manualshive.com logo in svg

ABB Relion REC615, Technical Manual

Share
Download
ABB Relion REC615 Technical Manual Download Page 17

13.4.1 

Ethernet RJ-45 front connection......................................................................................837

13.4.2  Ethernet rear connections.................................................................................................837
13.4.3  EIA-232 serial rear connection.......................................................................................... 837
13.4.4  EIA-485 serial rear connection......................................................................................... 838
13.4.5  Optical ST serial rear connection.....................................................................................838
13.4.6  Communication interfaces and protocols .................................................................... 838
13.4.7 

Rear communication modules..........................................................................................839

14  Technical data........................................................................................ 851

14.1  Dimensions...........................................................................................................................................851
14.2  Power supply........................................................................................................................................ 851
14.3  Energizing inputs................................................................................................................................ 851
14.4  Energizing inputs of SIM0001.......................................................................................................... 852
14.5  Energizing inputs of SIM0002/SIM0904........................................................................................853
14.6  Binary inputs........................................................................................................................................853
14.7  Signal output with high make and carry........................................................................................ 853
14.8  Signal outputs and IRF output.........................................................................................................854
14.9  Double-pole power outputs with TCS function X100: PO3 and PO4........................................ 854
14.10  Single-pole power output relays X100: PO1 and PO2...................................................................855
14.11  Ethernet interfaces.............................................................................................................................855
14.12  Serial rear interface............................................................................................................................ 856
14.13  Fibre-optic communication link.......................................................................................................856
14.14  IRIG-B..................................................................................................................................................... 857
14.15  Degree of protection of flush-mounted protection relay........................................................... 857
14.16  Environmental conditions................................................................................................................. 858

15  Protection relay and functionality tests............................................ 859

15.1  Electromagnetic compatibility tests.............................................................................................. 859
15.2  Insulation tests.................................................................................................................................... 861
15.3  Mechanical tests..................................................................................................................................861
15.4  Environmental tests........................................................................................................................... 862
15.5  Product safety..................................................................................................................................... 863
15.6  EMC compliance..................................................................................................................................863

16  Applicable standards and regulations............................................... 864

17  Glossary..................................................................................................865

Contents

REC615 & RER615

Technical Manual

17

Summary of Contents for Relion REC615

Page 1: ... RELION PRODUCT FAMILY Grid Automation REC615 and RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...Document ID 1MRS758755 Issued 2023 03 07 Revision C Product version 2 0 3 Copyright 2023 ABB All rights reserved ...

Page 4: ...ibed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used copied or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Warranty Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your n...

Page 5: ...cted and communicate data and information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessary measures such as but not limited to installation of firewalls application of authentication measures encryption of data inst...

Page 6: ...ent Safety Regulations 2016 The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Regulations 2012 These conformities are the result of tests conducted by the third party testing in accordance with the product standard EN BS EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive regulation and with the product standards EN BS EN 60255 1 and EN BS EN 60255 27 for the low volt...

Page 7: ...sion 28 2 2 Local HMI 29 2 2 1 Display 29 2 2 2 LEDs 30 2 2 3 Keypad 30 2 3 Web HMI 31 2 4 Authorization 32 2 4 1 Audit trail 33 2 5 Communication 35 2 5 1 Self healing Ethernet ring 36 2 5 2 Ethernet redundancy 37 2 5 3 Process bus 39 2 5 4 Secure communication 41 3 Basic functions 42 3 1 General parameters 42 3 1 1 Analog input settings phase currents 42 3 1 2 Analog input settings residual curr...

Page 8: ...63 3 4 2 Functionality 63 3 4 3 Signals 66 3 4 4 Settings 67 3 4 5 Monitored data 69 3 5 Time synchronization 70 3 5 1 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS 70 3 6 Parameter setting groups 73 3 6 1 Function block 74 3 6 2 Functionality 74 3 7 Test mode 75 3 7 1 Function blocks 75 3 7 2 Functionality 76 3 7 3 Application configuration and Test mode 76 3 7 4 Control mode 76 3 7 5 Application configuratio...

Page 9: ... 15 4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block 122 3 15 5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 122 3 15 6 GOOSERCV_CMV function block 123 3 15 7 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block 124 3 15 8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 124 3 16 Type conversion function blocks 125 3 16 1 QTY_GOOD function block 125 3 16 2 QTY_BAD function block 125 3 16 3 QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block 126 3 16 4 T_HEALTH function block 127 3 16 5 T_F32_IN...

Page 10: ...ection F PHxPTOC 214 4 1 2 Three phase directional overcurrent protection F DPHxPDOC 236 4 1 3 Three phase thermal protection for feeders cables and distribution transformers T1PTTR 266 4 1 4 Loss of phase undercurrent PHPTUC 272 4 2 Earth fault protection 277 4 2 1 Non directional earth fault protection F EFxPTOC 277 4 2 2 Directional earth fault protection F DEFxPDEF 294 4 2 3 Transient intermit...

Page 11: ...6 5 1 Three phase inrush detector INRPHAR 476 5 1 1 Identification 476 5 1 2 Function block 476 5 1 3 Functionality 476 5 1 4 Operation principle 476 5 1 5 Application 477 5 1 6 Signals 478 5 1 7 Settings 479 5 1 8 Monitored data 480 5 1 9 Technical data 480 5 1 10 Technical revision history 480 5 2 Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 480 5 2 1 Identification 481 5 2 2 Function block 481 5 ...

Page 12: ...CSSCBR 524 6 1 1 Identification 524 6 1 2 Function block 524 6 1 3 Functionality 524 6 1 4 Operation principle 524 6 1 5 Application 525 6 1 6 Signals 533 6 1 7 Settings 534 6 1 8 Monitored data 534 6 1 9 Technical revision history 534 6 2 Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC 534 6 2 1 Identification 534 6 2 2 Function block 535 6 2 3 Functionality 535 6 2 4 Operation principle 535 6 2 5 Application 5...

Page 13: ...7 1 4 Operation principle 552 7 1 5 Application 561 7 1 6 Signals 563 7 1 7 Settings 565 7 1 8 Monitored data 566 7 1 9 Technical data 567 7 1 10 Technical revision history 568 8 Measurement functions 569 8 1 Basic measurements 569 8 1 1 Functions 569 8 1 2 Measurement functionality 569 8 1 3 Measurement function applications 577 8 1 4 Three phase current measurement CMMXU 577 8 1 5 Three phase vo...

Page 14: ...ed data 637 9 1 9 Technical revision history 637 9 2 Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 638 9 2 1 Identification 638 9 2 2 Function block 638 9 2 3 Functionality 639 9 2 4 Operation principle 639 9 2 5 Application 639 9 2 6 Signals 640 9 2 7 Settings 641 9 2 8 Monitored data 642 9 2 9 Technical revision history 642 9 3 Synchronism and energizing check SE...

Page 15: ...rement functions 700 10 1 Current total demand distortion CMHAI 700 10 1 1 Identification 700 10 1 2 Function block 700 10 1 3 Functionality 700 10 1 4 Operation principle 700 10 1 5 Application 701 10 1 6 Signals 702 10 1 7 Settings 702 10 1 8 Monitored data 703 10 2 Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI 704 10 2 1 Identification 704 10 2 2 Function block 704 10 2 3 Functionality 704 10 2 4 Ope...

Page 16: ...T curves for overcurrent protection 743 11 2 2 Recloser inverse time characteristics 764 11 2 3 Reset in inverse time modes 805 11 2 4 Inverse timer freezing 815 11 3 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics 815 11 3 1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection 815 11 3 2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection 822 11 4 Frequency measurement and protection 826 11 5 Measurement modes...

Page 17: ...e and carry 853 14 8 Signal outputs and IRF output 854 14 9 Double pole power outputs with TCS function X100 PO3 and PO4 854 14 10 Single pole power output relays X100 PO1 and PO2 855 14 11 Ethernet interfaces 855 14 12 Serial rear interface 856 14 13 Fibre optic communication link 856 14 14 IRIG B 857 14 15 Degree of protection of flush mounted protection relay 857 14 16 Environmental conditions ...

Page 18: ...ormal service 1 2 Intended audience This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured functional logic in the protection relays The insta...

Page 19: ...chure Product guide Operation manual Installation manual Connection diagram Engineering manual Technical manual Communication protocol manual IEC 61850 Engineering guide Point list manual Figure 1 The intended use of documents during the product life cycle Product series and product specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site http www abb com relion 1MRS758755 C Introduction REC615 RE...

Page 20: ...om the ABB Web site www abb com substationautomation 1 3 3 Related documentation Name of the document Document ID Modbus Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS758758 DNP3 Communication Protocol Manual 1MRS758757 IEC 60870 5 101 104 Communication Proto col Manual 1MRS758756 IEC 61850 Engineering Guide 1MRS757809 Engineering Manual 1MRS757810 Installation Manual 1MRS757799 Operation Manual 1MRS758754 In...

Page 21: ...ion of damaged equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death Therefore comply fully with all warning and caution notices 1 4 2 Document conventions A particular convention may not be used in this manual Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary The glossary also contains definitions of important terms The example figures illustrate the IE...

Page 22: ...rectional overcurrent protection low stage in stance 4 DPHLPDOC4 3I 4 67 1 4 Three phase directional overcurrent protection high stage in stance 1 DPHHPDOC1 3I 1 67 2 1 Three phase directional overcurrent protection high stage in stance 2 DPHHPDOC2 3I 2 67 2 2 Three phase directional overcurrent protection high stage in stance 3 DPHHPDOC3 3I 3 67 2 3 Three phase directional overcurrent protection ...

Page 23: ... 1 Negative sequence overcurrent protection instance 2 NSPTOC2 I2 2 46 2 Phase discontinuity protection instance 1 PDNSPTOC1 I2 I1 1 46PD 1 Residual overvoltage protection instance 1 ROVPTOV1 Uo 1 59G 1 Residual overvoltage protection instance 2 ROVPTOV2 Uo 2 59G 2 Three phase undervoltage protection instance 1 PHPTUV1 3U 1 27 1 Three phase undervoltage protection instance 2 PHPTUV2 3U 2 27 2 Thre...

Page 24: ... 1 Voltage variation instance 1 PHQVVR1 PQMU 1 PQMV 1 Voltage unbalance instance 1 VSQVUB1 PQUUB 1 PQVUB 1 Control Circuit breaker control instance 1 CBXCBR1 I O CB 1 I O CB 1 Circuit breaker control instance 2 CBXCBR2 I O CB 2 I O CB 2 Disconnector control instance 1 DCXSWI1 I O DCC 1 I O DCC 1 Disconnector control instance 2 DCXSWI2 I O DCC 2 I O DCC 2 Disconnector control instance 3 DCXSWI3 I O...

Page 25: ...sence instance 2 PHSVPR2 PHSVPR 2 PHSVPR 2 Measurement Three phase current measurement instance 1 CMMXU1 3I 1 3I 1 Three phase current measurement instance 2 CMMXU2 3I 2 3I 2 Sequence current measurement instance 1 CSMSQI1 I1 I2 I0 1 I1 I2 I0 1 Sequence current measurement instance 2 CSMSQI2 I1 I2 I0 2 I1 I2 I0 2 Residual current measurement instance 1 RESCMMXU1 Io 1 In 1 Three phase voltage measu...

Page 26: ...MV 5 Move 8 pcs instance 6 MVGAPC6 MV 6 MV 6 Move 8 pcs instance 7 MVGAPC7 MV 7 MV 7 Move 8 pcs instance 8 MVGAPC8 MV 8 MV 8 Generic control point 16 pcs instance 1 SPCGAPC1 SPC 1 SPC 1 Generic control point 16 pcs instance 2 SPCGAPC2 SPC 2 SPC 2 Remote generic control points instance 1 SPCRGAPC1 SPCR 1 SPCR 1 Local generic control points instance 1 SPCLGAPC1 SPCL 1 SPCL 1 Generic up down counters...

Page 27: ...4 12 SCA4 12 Integer value move instance 1 MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 1 MVI4 1 Integer value move instance 2 MVI4GAPC2 MVI4 2 MVI4 2 Daily timer function instance 1 DTMGAPC1 DTMGAPC1 DTMGAPC1 Daily timer function instance 2 DTMGAPC2 DTMGAPC2 DTMGAPC2 Programmable buttons 4 buttons FKEY4GGIO1 FKEY4GGIO1 FKEY4GGIO1 Logging functions Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR 1 DFR 1 Fault record FLTRFRC1 FAULTREC 1 FAULTREC...

Page 28: ...RER615 relays support a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850 with Edition 2 support process bus according to IEC 61850 9 2 LE IEC 60870 5 101 104 Modbus and DNP3 2 1 1 Product series version history Product series version Product series history 1 0 REC615 released with configurations A B and C RER615 released with configurations A and D 1 1 Fault locator Transient intermittent eart...

Page 29: ...HMI is used for setting monitoring and controlling the protection relay The LHMI comprises the display buttons LED indicators and communication port Overcurrent Dir earth fault Combined Protection In sync fo close Frequency protection Breaker failure Disturb rec triggered CB condition monitoring Supervision Autoreclose shot in prog READY START PICKUP TRIP ESC CLEAR R L HELP MENU CLOSE OPEN F1 F4 F...

Page 30: ...e view Characters per row Small mono spaced 6 12 pixels 10 20 Large variable width 13 14 pixels 7 8 or more The display view is divided into four basic areas 1 2 3 4 1 Header 2 Icon 3 Content 4 Scroll bar displayed when needed Figure 3 Display layout 2 2 2 LEDs The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display Ready Start and Trip There are 11 matrix programmable LEDs on front of the...

Page 31: ...et indications provide help and switch between local and remote control mode 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 1 1 Function keys 2 Close 3 Open 4 Escape 5 Left 6 Up 7 Down 8 Right 9 Enter 10 Key 11 Clear 12 Menu 13 Remote Local 14 Communication port 15 Help Figure 4 LHMI keypad 2 3 Web HMI The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser When the Secure Communication paramet...

Page 32: ...asor diagram Single line diagram Importing Exporting parameters Report summary The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI Figure 5 Example view of the WHMI The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the front communication port Remotely over LAN WAN 2 4 Authorization Four user categories have been p...

Page 33: ...rail for the administrator Audit trail is a chronological record of system activities that allows the reconstruction and examination of the sequence of system and security related events and changes in the protection relay Both audit trail events and process related events can be examined and analyzed in a consistent method with the help of Event List in LHMI and WHMI and Event Viewer in PCM600 Th...

Page 34: ...850 8 1 MMS WHMI FTP or LHMI Logout Successful logout from IEC 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI FTP or LHMI Password change Password changed Firmware reset Reset issued by user or tool Audit overflow Too many audit events in the time period Violation remote Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI FTP or LHMI Violation local Unsuccessful login attempt from IEC 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI FTP or LHMI PCM600...

Page 35: ...communication between the protection relays is only enabled by the IEC 61850 communication protocol The IEC 61850 communication implementation supports all monitoring and control functions Additionally parameter settings disturbance recordings and fault records can be accessed using the IEC 61850 protocol Disturbance recordings are available to any Ethernet based application in the IEC 60255 24 st...

Page 36: ...f the MAC addresses and the link up link down events can cause temporary breaks in communication For a better performance of the self healing loop it is recommended that the external switch furthest from the protection relay loop is assigned as the root switch bridge priority 0 and the bridge priority increases towards the protection relay loop The end links of the protection relay loop can be att...

Page 37: ...t effective redundancy Thus each device incorporates a switch element that forwards frames from port to port IEC 62439 3 2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in 2010 These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439 3 Edition 2 The protection relay supports IEC 62439 3 2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439 3 2010 PRP Each PRP node called a ...

Page 38: ...d normal networks By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN By connecting the node to the protection relay s interlink port HSR HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring treating the two directions as two virtual LANs For each frame sent a node DAN sends two frames one over each port Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the ring and each node ...

Page 39: ...ol functions UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with current and voltage sensors The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGear Digital like simplicity with reduced wiring flexibility with data availability to all devices improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles With process bus the galvanic interpanel wiring for sharing busbar voltage value...

Page 40: ...rk as the IEC 61850 8 1 station bus The intended application for sampled values is sharing the measured voltages from REC615 or RER615 protection relay to other devices with phase voltage based functions and 9 2 support REC615 and RER615 protection relays with process bus based applications use IEEE 1588 v2 Precision Time Protocol PTP according to IEEE C37 238 2011 Power Profile for high accuracy ...

Page 41: ...irement is a communication card with IEEE 1588 v2 support COM0031 COM0037 See the IEC 61850 engineering guide for detailed system requirements and configuration details 2 5 4 Secure communication The protection relay supports secure communication for WHMI and file transfer protocol If the Secure Communication parameter is activated protocols require TLS based encryption method support from the cli...

Page 42: ... amplitude correction factor Amplitude Corr C 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Phase C amplitude correction factor Nominal current 39 4000 A 1 1300 Network Nominal Current In Rated secondary Val 1 000 150 000 mV Hz 0 001 3 000 Rated Secondary Value RSV ratio Reverse polarity 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the polari ty of the phase CTs Angle Corr A 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A angle cor re...

Page 43: ...Default Description Primary voltage 0 100 440 000 kV 0 001 11 547 Primary voltage Secondary volt age 60 210 V 1 100 Secondary voltage Amplitude Corr 0 9000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Amplitude correc tion Angle correction 20 0000 20 000 0 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Angle correction factor 3 1 4 Analog input settings residual voltage Table 10 Analog input settings residual voltage Parameter Values Range Unit Step...

Page 44: ...oltage transformer Division ratio 1000 20000 1 10000 Voltage sensor division ratio Voltage input type 1 Voltage trafo 3 CVD sensor 1 Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input Angle Corr A 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle cor rection of an external voltage trans former Angle Corr B 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase B Voltage phasor angle cor rection of an external ...

Page 45: ...word Remote engineer 0 Set password Remote adminis trator 0 Set password Local override 0 False 3 1 True 4 1 True Disable authority Local viewer 0 Set password Local operator 0 Set password Local engineer 0 Set password Local administrator 0 Set password 1 Authorization override is disabled communication tools ask password to enter the protection relay 2 Authorization override is enabled communica...

Page 46: ... default value is not optimal for the higher auxiliary voltages The binary input threshold voltage should be set as high as possible to prevent any inadvertent activation of the binary inputs due to possible external disturbances At the same time the threshold should be set so that the correct operation is not jeopardized in case of undervoltage of the auxiliary voltage 3 1 7 Binary signals in car...

Page 47: ... 254 IP address for front port fixed Mac address XX XX XX XX XX XX Mac address for front port 3 1 10 Ethernet rear port settings Table 17 Ethernet rear port settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description IP address 192 168 2 10 IP address for rear port s Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask for rear port s Default gateway 192 168 2 1 Default gateway for rear port s Mac address XX X...

Page 48: ...c tion BLOCK inputs Bay name 1 REC615 2 Bay name in system IDMT Sat point 10 50 I I 1 50 Overcurrent IDMT saturation point Frequency adaptivi ty 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Disable Enabling frequency adaptivity SMV Max Delay 0 1 90 1 58 ms 1 3 15 2 62 ms 2 4 40 3 67 ms 3 5 65 4 71 ms 4 6 90 5 75 ms 1 3 15 2 62 ms SMV Maximum al lowed delay 1 Used in the protection relay s main menu header and as part of ...

Page 49: ...ity 1 Basic 2 Advanced 1 Basic Setting visibility for HMI 3 1 13 IEC 60870 5 101 104 settings Table 20 IEC 60870 5 101 104 settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 5 off Selects if this protocol instance is ena bled or disabled Port 1 IEC101 COM 1 2 IEC101 COM 2 3 IEC104 Ethernet 3 IEC104 Ethernet Port selection ClientIP 0 0 0 0 IP address of the client TC...

Page 50: ...serve chronology 0 Accurate time Selects the event ordering principle Selection Timeout 1 65 s 1 30 Selection timeout for control SBO opera tions Counter Reporting 0 Read by master 1 Spontaneous 0 Read by master Counter reporting after freeze Freeze mode 0 Not in use t 1 Freeze only 2 Freeze and Reset 0 Not in use Periodic freezing mode for integrated to tals TX window k 1 20 1 12 IEC60870 5 104 t...

Page 51: ...s 2 MMS client expects nominal values from event reporting and data attribute reads this is the default for PCM600 3 For PCM600 use only When Unit mode is set to Primary the PCM600 client can force its session to Nominal by selecting Primary Nominal and thus parameterizing in native form The selection is not stored and is therefore effective only for one session This value has no effect if selecte...

Page 52: ...delay in char acter times for seri al connection End delay 0 20 1 4 End delay in charac ter times for serial connections CRC order 0 Hi Lo 1 Lo Hi 0 Hi Lo Selects between normal or swap ped byte order for checksum for seri al connection De fault Hi Lo Client IP 0 0 0 0 Sets the IP address of the client If set to zero connection from any client is accepted Write authority 0 Read only 1 Disable 0x w...

Page 53: ...trol Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 4 Password for con trol operations us ing Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 5 Password for con trol operations us ing Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 6 Password for con trol operations us ing Control Struct mechanism which is availa...

Page 54: ...interval for DNP Validate master addr 1 Disable 2 Enable 1 Disable Validate master address on receive Self address 1 Disable 2 Enable 2 Enable Support self address query function Need time interval 0 65535 min 1 30 Period to set IIN need time bit Time format 0 UTC 1 Local 1 Local UTC or local Coordinate with master CROB select timeout 1 65535 s 1 10 Control Relay Output Block select timeout Data l...

Page 55: ...te UR UR Class 3 Min events 0 999 1 2 Min number of class 3 events to generate UR UR Class 3 TO 0 65535 ms 1 50 Max holding time for class 3 events to gener ate UR Legacy master UR 1 Disable 2 Enable 1 Disable Legacy DNP master un solicited mode support When enabled relay does not send initial unsolici ted message Legacy master SBO 1 Disable 2 Enable 1 Disable Legacy DNP Master SBO sequence number...

Page 56: ...ag 4 4 16bit AI noflag 5 5 AI float 6 6 AI double 5 5 AI float 1 32 bit AI 2 16 bit AI 3 32 bit AI without flag 4 16 bit AI without flag 5 AI float 6 AI double Default Var Obj 32 1 1 32bit AI evt 2 2 16bit AI evt 3 3 32bit AI evt time 4 4 16bit AI evt time 5 5 float AI evt 6 6 double AI evt 7 7 float AI evt time 8 8 double AI evt time 7 7 float AI evt time 1 32 bit AI event 2 16 bit AI event 3 32 ...

Page 57: ...hannels There are two types of fault indications Internal faults Warnings 3 2 1 Internal faults When an internal relay fault is detected relay protection operation is disabled the green Ready LED begins to flash and the self supervision output contact is activated Internal fault indications have the highest priority on the LHMI None of the other LHMI indications can override the internal fault ind...

Page 58: ...act The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault When a fault appears the code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service Table 25 Internal fault indications and codes Fault indication Fault code Additional information Internal Fault System error 2 An internal system error has occurred Internal Fault File system error 7 A file system error has occurre...

Page 59: ... wrong type is missing does not belong to original configuration or card firmware is faulty Internal Fault Conf error X100 63 Card in slot X100 is wrong type or does not belong to the original composition Internal Fault Conf error X110 64 Card in slot X110 is wrong type is missing or does not belong to the original composi tion Internal Fault Conf error X120 65 Card in slot X120 is wrong type is m...

Page 60: ...times within a short time Internal Fault COM card error 116 Error in the COM card For further information on internal fault indications see the operation manual 3 2 2 Warnings In case of a warning the protection relay continues to operate except for those protection functions possibly affected by the fault and the green Ready LED remains lit as during normal operation Warnings are indicated with t...

Page 61: ...config error 27 Error in the SCL configuration file or the file is missing Warning Logic error 28 Too many connections in the config uration Warning SMT logic error 29 Error in the SMT connections Warning GOOSE input error 30 Error in the GOOSE connections ACT error 31 Error in the ACT connections Warning GOOSE Rx error 32 Error in the GOOSE message receiv ing Warning AFL error 33 Analog channel c...

Page 62: ...mporary error occurred in RTD card located in slot X130 Warning RTD meas error X130 106 Measurement error in RTD card loca ted in slot X130 For further information on warning indications see the operation manual 3 3 LED indication control 3 3 1 Function block Figure 12 Function block 3 3 2 Functionality The protection relay includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used with the prot...

Page 63: ...rmation from different protection functions available as output signals OUT_ST_A _B _C and OUT_OPR_A _B _C There is also combined earth fault information collected from all the earth fault functions available in the relay configuration available as output signals OUT_ST_NEUT and OUT_OPR_NEUT 3 4 Programmable LEDs 3 4 1 Function block Figure 13 Function block 3 4 2 Functionality The programmable LE...

Page 64: ...ting the default value being Red The OK input corresponds to the color that is available with the default value being Green Changing the Alarm colour setting to Green changes the color behavior of the OK inputs to red The ALARM input has a higher priority than the OK input Each LED is seen in the Application Configuration tool as an individual function block Each LED has user editable description ...

Page 65: ...nd LatchedAck F S The OK input behavior is always according to Follow S The alarm input latched modes can be cleared with the reset input in the application logic Figure 16 Symbols used in the sequence diagrams Follow S Follow Signal ON In this mode ALARM follows the input signal value Non latched Activating signal LED Figure 17 Operating sequence Follow S Follow F Follow Signal Flashing Similar t...

Page 66: ...e LatchedAck F S 3 4 3 Signals 3 4 3 1 Input signals Table 27 Input signals Name Type Default Description OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 1 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 1 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 1 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 2 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 2 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 2 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 3 ALAR...

Page 67: ...ET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 8 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 9 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 9 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 9 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 10 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 10 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 10 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 11 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 11 RESET BOOLEAN 0 Fals...

Page 68: ...S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 5 Description Programmable LEDs LED 5 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 6 Description Programmable LEDs LED 6 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 7 Descripti...

Page 69: ...Description Programmable LED 1 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 1 Programmable LED 2 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 2 Programmable LED 3 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 3 Programmable LED 4 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 4 Programmable LED 5 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programma ble LED 5 Programmable LED 6...

Page 70: ...it is set to None the clock is free running and the settings Date and Time can be used to set the time manually Other setting values activate a communication protocol that provides the time synchronization Only one synchronization method can be active at a time IEEE 1588 v2 and SNTP provide time master redundancy The protection relay supports SNTP IRIG B IEEE 1588 v2 DNP3 and Modbus to update the ...

Page 71: ...ies to switch back to the primary server on every third SNTP request attempt If both the SNTP servers are offline event time stamps have the time invalid status The time is requested from the SNTP server every 60 seconds Supported SNTP versions are 3 and 4 IRIG B time synchronization requires the IRIG B format B004 B005 according to the 200 04 IRIG B standard Older IRIG B standards refer to these ...

Page 72: ...ption Date 0 Date Time 0 Time Local time offset 840 840 min 1 0 Local time offset in mi nutes Table 33 Non group settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description IP SNTP primary 10 58 125 165 IP address for SNTP primary server IP SNTP secondary 192 168 2 165 IP address for SNTP secon dary server Table 34 Non group settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description DST in us...

Page 73: ...i nutes 0 59 min 0 Daylight saving time off time mm DST off date day 1 31 25 Daylight saving time off date dd mm DST off date month 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December 9 September Daylight saving time off date dd mm DST off day week day 0 reserved 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 7 Sunday 0 re...

Page 74: ...ption Operator Default Setting group can be changed with the setting Settings Setting group Active group Value of the SG_LOGIC_SEL output is FALSE Logic mode 1 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs BI_SG_2 BI_SG_6 The highest TRUE binary input defines the active setting group Value of the SG_LOGIC_SEL output is TRUE Logic mode 2 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs where BI_SG...

Page 75: ...n mode Logic mode 1 Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 1 TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 2 any TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3 any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4 any any any TRUE FALSE 5 any any any any TRUE 6 Table 37 SG operation mode Logic mode 2 Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group FALSE FALSE FALSE any any 1 TRUE FALSE FALSE any any 2 ...

Page 76: ...test and blocked Protection working as in Normal mode but protection functions are working in parallel with test parameters ACT configuration can be used to block physical outputs to process Control function commands blocked TRUE Behavior data objects in all logical nodes follow LD0 LLN0 Mod value If Normal mode is selected behaviour data objects follow mode Mod data object of the corresponding lo...

Page 77: ... need to be blocked totally meaning also commands from the binary inputs the application configuration must be used to block these signals Blocking scheme uses BEH_BLK output of CONTROL function block 3 7 6 Authorization By default Test mode and Control mode can only be changed from LHMI It is possible to write test mode by remote client if it is needed in configuration This is done via LHMI only ...

Page 78: ...g group 5 is ac tive BI_SG_6 BOOLEAN 0 Setting group 6 is ac tive 3 7 8 2 CONTROL input signals Table 42 CONTROL input signals Name Type Default Description CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN 0 Control OFF CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN 0 Control local CTRL_STA BOOLEAN 0 Control station CTRL_REM BOOLEAN 0 Control remote CTRL_ALL BOOLEAN 0 Control all 3 7 8 3 PROTECTION output signals Table 43 PROTECTION output signals Name Type ...

Page 79: ...trol station REMOTE BOOLEAN Control remote ALL BOOLEAN Control all BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block sta tus BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test sta tus 3 8 Fault recorder FLTRFRC 3 8 1 Function block Figure 23 Function block 3 8 2 Functionality The protection relay has the capacity to store the records of 128 latest fault events Fault records include fundamental or RMS current values T...

Page 80: ... be advisable to set the setting parameter Trig mode to From operate Then only faults that cause an operate event trigger a new fault recording The fault related current voltage frequency angle values shot pointer and the active setting group number are taken from the moment of the operate event or from the beginning of the fault if only a start event occurs during the fault The maximum current va...

Page 81: ...PHHPTOC4 12 PHIPTOC1 13 PHIPTOC2 17 EFLPTOC1 18 EFLPTOC2 19 EFLPTOC3 21 DEFHPDEF4 22 EFHPTOC1 23 EFHPTOC2 24 EFHPTOC3 25 EFHPTOC4 30 EFIPTOC1 31 EFIPTOC2 32 EFIPTOC3 33 DPHHPDOC4 34 DPHLPDOC4 35 NSPTOC1 36 NSPTOC2 7 INTRPTEF1 5 STTPMSU1 3 JAMPTOC1 41 PDNSPTOC 1 44 T1PTTR1 46 T2PTTR1 47 DEFLPDEF4 48 MPTTR1 50 DEFLPDEF1 51 DEFLPDEF2 53 DEFHPDEF1 56 EFPADM1 57 EFPADM2 58 EFPADM3 59 FRPFRQ1 Protection...

Page 82: ... TR2PTDF1 91 LNPLDF1 92 LREFPNDF1 94 MPDIF1 96 HREFPDIF1 100 ROVPTOV1 101 ROVPTOV2 102 ROVPTOV3 104 PHPTOV1 105 PHPTOV2 106 PHPTOV3 108 PHPTUV1 109 PHPTUV2 110 PHPTUV3 112 NSPTOV1 113 NSPTOV2 116 PSPTUV1 118 ARCSARC1 119 ARCSARC2 120 ARCSARC3 96 SPHIPTOC1 93 SPHLPTOC2 92 SPHLPTOC1 89 SPHHPTOC2 88 SPHHPTOC1 87 SPHPTUV4 86 SPHPTUV3 85 SPHPTUV2 84 SPHPTUV1 83 SPHPTOV4 82 SPHPTOV3 Table continues on t...

Page 83: ... 75 DPHHPDOC2 89 LOFLPTUC2 103 ROVPTOV4 117 PSPTUV2 13 PHPTUC3 3 PHLPTOC3 10 PHHPTOC5 11 PHHPTOC6 28 EFHPTOC7 29 EFHPTOC8 107 PHPTOV4 111 PHPTUV4 114 NSPTOV3 115 NSPTOV4 30 PHDSTPDIS1 29 TR3PTDF1 28 HICPDIF1 27 HIBPDIF1 26 HIAPDIF1 32 LSHDPFRQ8 31 LSHDPFRQ7 70 LSHDPFRQ6 80 MAPGAPC4 81 MAPGAPC5 82 MAPGAPC6 83 MAPGAPC7 102 MAPGAPC12 101 MAPGAPC11 100 MAPGAPC10 99 MAPGAPC9 Table continues on the next...

Page 84: ...PDEF3 84 MAPGAPC8 93 LREFPNDF2 97 HREFPDIF2 117 XDEFLPDEF2 116 XDEFLPDEF1 115 SDPHLPDOC2 114 SDPHLPDOC1 113 XNSPTOC 2 112 XNSPTOC1 111 XEFIPTOC2 110 XEFHPTOC4 109 XEFHPTOC3 108 XEFLPTOC3 107 XEFLPTOC2 66 DQPTUV1 65 VVSPPAM1 64 PHPVOC1 63 H3EFPSEF1 60 HCUBPTOC1 59 CUBPTOC1 72 DOPPDPR1 69 DUPPDPR1 61 COLPTOC1 106 MAPGAPC16 105 MAPGAPC15 104 MAPGAPC14 103 MAPGAPC13 76 MAPGAPC18 75 MAPGAPC17 62 SRCPTO...

Page 85: ...PHBPTOV1 17 MPUPF2 16 MPUPF1 14 OOSRPSB1 2 PHCPTUV1 1 PHBPTUV1 Start duration FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Maximum start duration of all stages during the fault Operate time FLOAT32 0 000 999999 9 99 s Operate time Breaker clear time FLOAT32 0 000 3 000 s Breaker clear time Fault distance FLOAT32 0 00 3000 00 pu Distance to fault meas ured in pu Fault resistance FLOAT32 0 00 1000000 0 0 ohm Fault resistanc...

Page 86: ...0 000 pu Maximum phase C bias current Bias current IL1 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 pu Bias current phase A Bias current IL2 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 pu Bias current phase B Bias current IL3 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 pu Bias current phase C Diff current Io FLOAT32 0 000 80 000 pu Differential current re sidual Bias current Io FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 pu Bias current residual Max current IL1 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Ma...

Page 87: ...00 xIn Maximum phase A cur rent c Max current IL2C FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum phase B cur rent c Max current IL3C FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum phase C cur rent c Max current IoC FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum residual cur rent c Current IL1C FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Phase A current c Current IL2C FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Phase B current c Current IL3C FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Phase C c...

Page 88: ... FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Positive sequence volt age b Voltage Ng SeqB FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Negative sequence volt age b PTTR thermal level FLOAT32 0 00 99 99 PTTR calculated tem perature of the protec ted object relative to the operate level PDNSPTOC1 rat I2 I1 FLOAT32 0 00 999 99 PDNSPTOC1 ratio I2 I1 Frequency FLOAT32 30 00 80 00 Hz Frequency Frequency gradient FLOAT32 10 00 10 00 Hz s Freque...

Page 89: ...nd voltages This chapter gives short examples on how to define the correct parameters for sensors Sensors have corrections factors measured and verified by the sensor manufacturer to increase the measurement accuracy of primary values Correction factors are recommended to be set Two types of correction factors are available for voltage and rogowski sensors The Amplitude correction factor is named ...

Page 90: ...Rogowski sensor settings can be set Table 48 Example setting values for rogowski sensor Setting Value Primary current 150 A Rated secondary value 5 625 mV Hz Nominal current 150 A Unless otherwise specified the Nominal Current setting should always be the same as the Primary Current setting If the ratio of the application nominal current In and sensor rated primary current Ipr becomes higher and t...

Page 91: ...is example the system phase to phase voltage rating is 10 kV Thus the Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV For protection relays with sensor measurement support the Voltage input type is always set to CVD sensor and it cannot be changed The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to WYE type The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000 1 Thus the Div...

Page 92: ...e parameter Input filter where is the number of the binary input of the module in question for example Input 1 filter Table 51 Input filter parameter values Parameter Values Default Input filter time 5 1000 ms 5 ms 3 11 2 Binary input inversion The parameter Input invert is used to invert a binary input Table 52 Binary input states Control voltage Input invert State of binary input No 0 FALSE 0 Ye...

Page 93: ...cal or remote control actions of a breaker or a disconnector and for connecting the protection relay to external annunciation equipment for indicating signalling and recording Power output contacts are used when the current rating requirements of the contacts are high for example for controlling a breaker such as energizing the breaker trip and closing coils The contacts used for external signalli...

Page 94: ...elay is provided The power outputs are included in slot X100 of the power supply module PO1 PO2 X100 6 7 8 9 Figure 25 Dual single pole power output contacts PO1 and PO2 3 12 1 2 Double pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double pole normally open form A power outputs with trip circuit supervision When the two poles of the contacts are con...

Page 95: ...ical output that is rated as a power output The outputs are normally used in applications that require fast relay output contact activation time to achieve fast opening of a breaker such as arc protection or breaker failure protection where fast operation is required either to minimize fault effects to the equipment or to avoid a fault to expand to a larger area With the high speed outputs the tot...

Page 96: ...contacts are used for energizing for example external low burden trip relays auxiliary relays annunciators and LEDs A single signal contact is rated for a continuous current of 5 A It has a make and carry for 0 5 seconds at 15 A When two contacts are connected in parallel the relay is of a different design It has the make and carry rating of 30 A for 0 5 seconds This can be applied for energizing ...

Page 97: ...r supply module of the protection relay 10 11 12 X100 SO1 14 13 X100 SO2 Figure 29 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module 3 12 2 3 Signal outputs SO1 SO2 SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005 The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1 SO2 SO3 and SO4 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual parallel form C contacts SO3 is a single form C contact and SO4 is a single form A contact 1MRS758755 ...

Page 98: ...n BIO0005 3 12 2 4 Signal outputs SO1 SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006 The optional card BIO0006 provides the signal outputs SO1 SO2 and SO3 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual parallel form C contacts SO3 is a single form C contact Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 98 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 99: ...ciple All the inputs of the module are independent RTD and mA channels with individual protection reference and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module However the RTD inputs share a common ground 3 13 2 1 Selection of input signal type The function module inputs accept current or resistance type signals The inputs are conf...

Page 100: ...used for DC milliampere signal and the application requires a linear scaling of the input range the Value unit setting value has to be Dimensionless where the input range can be linearly scaled with settings Input minimum and Input maximum to Value minimum and Value maximum When milliampere is used as an output unit Value unit has to be Ampere When Value unit is set to Ampere the linear scaling is...

Page 101: ...put channel If the measured input value is outside the limits minimum maximum value is shown in the corresponding output The quality of the corresponding output is set accordingly to indicate misbehavior in the RTD mA input Table 55 Function identification limits for the RTD mA inputs Input Limit value RTD temperature high 200 C RTD temperature low 40 C mA current high 23 mA Resistance high 2000 Ω...

Page 102: ...rted AI_RANGE 1 AI_RANGE 3 AI_RANGE 0 Hysteresis Val high high limit Val high limit Val low limit Val low low limit AI_RANGE 2 AI_RANGE 4 Y t AI_RANGE 0 Value Reported Value maximum Value minimum Out of Range Figure 33 Limit value supervision for RTD X130 The range information of High high limit and Low low limit is combined from all measurement channels to the Boolean ALARM output The range infor...

Page 103: ...ision function reports the measured value according to integrated changes over a time period Figure 34 Integral deadband supervision The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the Value deadband setting The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum limits in the units of 0 001 percent seconds The reporting delay of the integral al...

Page 104: ... TCR 0 00618 Copper TCR 0 00427 Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10 40 84 27 210 675 79 1 94 92 197 75 7 49 30 88 22 220 55 84 1 100 92 210 25 20 92 16 230 4 89 3 107 16 223 25 8 263 10 96 09 240 225 94 6 113 52 236 5 0 100 250 100 120 250 9 035 10 103 9 259 75 105 6 126 72 264 20 107 79 269 475 111 2 133 44 278 9 807 30 111 67 279 175 117 1 140 52 292 75 40 115 54 288 85 123 147 6 307 5 10 5...

Page 105: ...D mA input connection RTD inputs can be used with a 2 wire or 3 wire connection with common ground When using the 3 wire connection it is important that all three wires connecting the sensor are symmetrical that is the wires are of the same type and length Thus the wire resistance is automatically compensated Figure 35 Three RTD resistance sensors connected according to the 3 wire connection 1MRS7...

Page 106: ...nection X130 1 2 11 12 Transducer Sensor Shunt 44 Ω Figure 37 mA wiring connection 3 13 2 11 RTD mA card variants The available variants of RTD cards are 6RTD 2mA and 2RTD 1mA The features are similar in both cards Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 106 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 107: ...asurements RTD mA input connection Resistance and temperature sensors can be connected to the 6RTD 2mA board with 3 wire and 2 wire connections Resistor sensor X110 mA mA1 mA mA2 RTD1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RTD2 RTD3 Figure 38 Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 3 wire connection for 6RTD 2mA card 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manu...

Page 108: ...6 15 16 Transducer Sensor Shunt 44 Ω Figure 40 mA wiring connection for 6RTD 2mA card 2RTD 1mA card This type of card accepts one milliampere input two inputs from RTD sensors and five inputs from VTs The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and inputs 4 to 8 are used for measuring input data from VT Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 108 REC615 RER615 Technica...

Page 109: ...r X130 mA mA RTD1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 RTD2 5 Figure 41 Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 3 wire connection for RTD mA card Resistor sensor X130 mA mA RTD1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 RTD2 5 Figure 42 Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2 wire connection for RTD mA card 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 109 ...

Page 110: ...OAT32 RTD input Connectors 7 8 11c instantaneous value AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 9 10 11c instantane ous value AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 13 14 12c instantane ous value AI_VAL7 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 15 16 12c instantane ous value AI_VAL8 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 17 18 12c instantane ous value 3 13 4 Settings Table 60 Non group settings Parameter Values Range Unit St...

Page 111: ...Output value low warning limit for supervision Value low low limit 10000 0 10000 0 1 10000 0 Output value low alarm limit for supervision Value deadband 100 100000 1 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral calculation percentage of difference between min and max as 0 001 s Table 61 Non group settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Input mode 1 Not in use 5 0 20mA 1 Not...

Page 112: ... data Name Type Values Range Unit Description AI_DB1 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 mA input Connectors 1 2 reported value AI_RANGE1 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low mA input Connectors 1 2 range AI_DB2 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 mA input Connectors 3 4 reported value AI_RANGE2 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low mA input Connectors 3 4 range AI_DB3 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 RTD i...

Page 113: ...high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Connectors 17 18 12c range 3 14 SMV function blocks SMV function blocks are used in the process bus applications with the sending of the sampled values of analog currents and voltages and with the receiving of the sampled values of voltages 3 14 1 IEC 61850 9 2 LE sampled values sending SMVSENDER 3 14 1 1 Functionality The SMVSENDER function block is used...

Page 114: ...3 14 1 2 Settings Table 63 SMVSENDER Settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 114 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 115: ...2 phase 2 voltage UL3 INT32 UL3 IEC61850 9 2 phase 3 voltage U0 INT32 Uo IEC61850 9 2 residual voltage 3 14 3 ULTVTR function block 3 14 3 1 Function block Figure 45 Function block 3 14 3 2 Functionality The ULTVTR function is used in the receiver application to perform the supervision for the sampled values and to connect the received analog phase voltage inputs to the application Synchronization...

Page 116: ... supposed to be connected through a protection relay s binary input to the NC auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit The MINCB_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output signal to block all the voltage related functions when MCB is in the open state The WARNING output in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the sender or the receiver...

Page 117: ...000 1 1000 0 0001 1 0000 Phase C Voltage phasor magni tude correction of an external voltage transformer Division ratio 1000 20000 1 10000 Voltage sensor division ratio Voltage input type 1 Voltage trafo 3 CVD sensor 1 Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input Angle Corr A 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle correction of an external volt age transformer Angle Corr B 20 00...

Page 118: ...ame is corrected with a zero order hold scheme In this case the effect on protection is considered negligible and the WARNING or ALARM outputs are not activated The output is held on for 10 seconds after the conditions return to normal The SMV Max Delay parameter defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames before activating the ALARM output This parameter can be accessed via Configurati...

Page 119: ...GOOSE function blocks GOOSE function blocks are used for connecting incoming GOOSE data to application They support BOOLEAN Dbpos Enum FLOAT32 INT8 and INT32 data types Common signals The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data which means in case of valid that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality bits if configured indicate good process data Invalid stat...

Page 120: ... BOOLEAN Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 2 GOOSERCV_DP function block 3 15 2 1 Function block Figure 48 Function block 3 15 2 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs to the application 3 15 2 3 Signals Table 72 GOOSERCV_DP Output signals Name Type Description OUT Dbpos Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal Basic functions 1MRS75...

Page 121: ...tionality The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application 3 15 3 3 Signals Table 73 GOOSERCV_MV Output signals Name Type Description OUT FLOAT32 Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 121 ...

Page 122: ...l VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 3 15 5 1 Function block Figure 51 Function block 3 15 5 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INTL function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal The OP output signal indicates that the position is open Default value 0 is used i...

Page 123: ...1 Function block Figure 52 Function block 3 15 6 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_CMV function is used to connect GOOSE measured value inputs to the application The MAG_IN amplitude and ANG_IN angle inputs are defined in the GOOSE configuration PCM600 The MAG output passes the received GOOSE amplitude value for the application Default value 0 is used if VALID output indicates invalid status The ANG ou...

Page 124: ...n 3 15 7 3 Signals Table 77 GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals Name Type Description OUT Enum Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 3 15 8 1 Function block Figure 54 Function block 3 15 8 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INT32 function block is used to connect GOOSE 32 bit integer inputs to the application Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 124 REC615 RER615 Technical Manu...

Page 125: ...ogic application signal logic function output binary input application function output or received GOOSE signal Due to application logic quality bit propagation each simple and even combined signal has quality which can be evaluated The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal Input signals that have no quality bits set or only test bit is set will indicate quality good status 3 16 1 ...

Page 126: ...o application logic quality bit propagation each simple and even combined signal has quality which can be evaluated The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal Input signals that have any other than test bit set will indicate quality bad status 3 16 2 3 Signals Table 81 QTY_BAD Input signals Name Type Default Description IN Any 0 Input signal Table 82 QTY_BAD Output signals Name Type ...

Page 127: ...COMM Output signals Name Type Description COMMVALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 16 4 T_HEALTH function block 3 16 4 1 Function block Figure 58 Function block 3 16 4 2 Functionality The T_HEALTH function evaluates enumerated data of Health data attribute This function block can only be used with GOOSE The IN input can be connected to GOOSERCV_ENUM function block which is receiving the LD0 LLN0 Health s...

Page 128: ... 3 16 5 2 Functionality The T_F32_INT8 function is used to convert 32 bit floating type values to 8 bit integer type The rounding operation is included Output value saturates if the input value is below the minimum or above the maximum value 3 16 5 3 Signals Table 87 T_F32_INT8 Input signals Name Type Default Description F32 FLOAT32 0 0 Input signal Table 88 T_F32_INT8 Output signal Name Type Desc...

Page 129: ...ceive the value from the sending device or it is invalid the default value 0 is used in function outputs The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value 3 16 6 3 Signals Table 89 T_DIR Input signals Name Type Default Description DIR Enum 0 Input signal Table 90 T_DIR Output signals Name Type Default Description FWD BOOLEAN 0 Direction forward REV BOOLEAN 0 Direction backward ...

Page 130: ... Type Description RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command 3 16 8 T_TCMD_BIN function block 3 16 8 1 Function block Figure 62 Function block 3 16 8 2 Functionality The T_TCMD_BIN function is used to convert 32 bit integer input signal to Boolean output signals Table 94 Conversion from integer to Boolean IN RAISE LOWER 0 FALSE FALSE 1 FALSE TRUE 2 TRUE FALSE x FALSE FALSE Basic funct...

Page 131: ...nction block Figure 63 Function block 3 16 9 2 Functionality The T_BIN_TCMD function is used to convert Boolean input signals to 32 bit integer output signals Table 97 Conversion from Boolean to integer RAISE LOWER OUT FALSE FALSE 0 FALSE TRUE 1 TRUE FALSE 2 3 16 9 3 Signals Table 98 T_BIN_TCMD input signals Name Type Default Description RAISE BOOLEAN 0 Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN 0 Lower command ...

Page 132: ... Functionality OR OR6 and OR20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE The default value of all inputs is FALSE which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected OR has two inputs OR6 six and OR20 twenty inputs Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 132 REC615 ...

Page 133: ... B3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4 B5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5 B6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 B7 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 7 B8 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 8 B9 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 9 B10 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 10 B11 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 11 B12 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 12 B13 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 13 B14 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 14 B15 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 15 B16 BOOLEAN 0 Input sig...

Page 134: ... AND Function block AND Function block Figure 65 Function blocks Functionality AND AND6 and AND20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables The default value in all inputs is logical true which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected AND has two inputs AND6 six inputs and AND20 twenty inputs Basic functions 1MRS75875...

Page 135: ...2 B3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4 B5 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 5 B6 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 6 B7 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 7 B8 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 8 B9 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 9 B10 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 10 B11 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 11 B12 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 12 B13 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 13 B14 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 14 B15 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 15 B16 BOOLEAN 1 Input si...

Page 136: ...xclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables The output signal is TRUE if the input signals are different and FALSE if they are equal Signals Table 112 XOR Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 Table 113 XOR Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function d...

Page 137: ... Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 5 MAX3 function block Function block Figure 68 Function block Functionality The maximum function MAX3 selects the maximum value from three analog values Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored If all inputs are disconnected or the quality is b...

Page 138: ...gure 69 Function block Functionality The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored If all inputs are disconnected or the quality is bad MIN3 output value is set to 2 21 Signals Table 118 MIN3 Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 1 IN2 FLOAT32 0 Input signal 2 IN3 FLOAT32...

Page 139: ... TRUE At the next execution round the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input Signals Table 120 R_TRIG Input signals Name Type Default Description CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 121 R_TRIG Output signal Name Type Description Q BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 8 F_TRIG function block Function block Figur...

Page 140: ... Figure 72 Function blocks Functionality The circuit breaker position information can be communicated with the IEC 61850 GOOSE messages The position information is a double binary data type which is fed to the POS input T_POS_CL and T_POS_OP are used for extracting the circuit breaker status information Respectively T_POS_OK is used to validate the intermediate or faulty breaker position Table 124...

Page 141: ...LOSE BOOLEAN Output signal Table 129 T_POS_OP Output signal Name Type Description OPEN BOOLEAN Output signal Table 130 T_POS_OK Output signal Name Type Description OK BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 10 SWITCHR function block Function block Figure 73 Function block Functionality SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is...

Page 142: ...nction block Function block Figure 74 Function block Functionality SWITCHI32 switching block for 32 bit integer data type is operated by the CTL_SW input which selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs Table 133 SWITCHI32 CTL_SW OUT FALSE IN2 TRUE IN1 Signals Table 134 SWITCHI32 input signals Name Type Default Description CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch IN1 INT32 0 Input signal 1...

Page 143: ... negation of output Q The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory Table 136 Truth table for SR flip flop S R Q 0 0 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Signals Table 137 SR Input signals Name Type Default Description S BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q output when set R BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q output when set Table 138 SR Output signals Name Type Description Q BOOLEAN Q status NOTQ BOOLEAN ...

Page 144: ...tputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory Table 139 Truth table for RS flip flop S R Q 0 0 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 Signals Table 140 RS Input signals Name Type Default Description S BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q output when set R BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q output when set Table 141 RS Output signals Name Type Description Q BOOLEAN Q status NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status 1 Keep state no change Basic...

Page 145: ...settable pulse length in milliseconds The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example the signal outputs Once the input is activated the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting Both timers use the same setting parameter Figure 78 A Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting B Trip pulse is longer than Pulse time setting Signals Table 143 TPGAPC In...

Page 146: ... improvement 3 17 2 2 Minimum pulse timer TPSGAPC Function block Figure 79 Function block Functionality The Minimum second pulse timer function TPSGAPC contains two independent timers The function has a settable pulse length in seconds The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example the signal outputs Once the input is activated the output is set for a specific duration using ...

Page 147: ...ory Table 150 TPSGAPC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Outputs now visible in menu C Internal improvement 3 17 2 3 Minimum pulse timer TPMGAPC Function block Figure 81 Function block Functionality The Minimum minute pulse timer function TPMGAPC contains two independent timers The function has a settable pulse length in minutes The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse...

Page 148: ...Table 152 TPMGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Settings TPMGAPC Non group settings Basic Table 153 TPMGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0 300 min 1 0 Minimum pulse time 3 17 3 Pulse timer PTGAPC 3 17 3 1 Function block Figure 83 Function block Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 1...

Page 149: ... False Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 3 status IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 4 status IN5 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 5 status IN6 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 6 status IN7 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 7 status IN8 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 8 status Table 155 PTGAPC Output signals Name Type Description Q1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status Q2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Q3 BOOLEAN Output 3 statu...

Page 150: ... Technical data Table 157 PTGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 3 17 4 Daily timer function DTMGAPC 3 17 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Daily timer function DTMGAPC DTMGAPC DTMGAPC 3 17 4 2 Function block DTMGAPC Q BLOCK FREEZE Figure 85 Function block 3...

Page 151: ...ctivation times can be set for all days of the week The activation and deactivation can also be disabled for a specific day for example if the activation or deactivation is not needed on Sundays the Sunday Act enable can be set False Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the function output whereas the activation of FREEZE input freezes the output The BLOCK input has always a higher priority t...

Page 152: ... 3 17 4 7 Settings Table 160 DTMGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Monday Act enable 0 False 1 True false Activation deactivation need on Monday Monday Act hour 0 23 h 8 Activation hour time for Mon day Monday Act Mn 0 59 min 0 Activation minute time for Mon day Monday off delay 1 1440 min 1 60 Activation du...

Page 153: ...min 1 60 Activation duration for Thurs day Friday Act enable 0 False 1 True false Activation deactivation need on Friday Friday Act hour 0 23 h 8 Activation hour time for Friday Friday Act Mn 0 59 min 0 Activation minute time for Fri day Friday off delay 1 1440 min 1 60 Activation duration for Friday Saturday Act enable 0 False 1 True false Activation deactivation need on Saturday Saturday Act hou...

Page 154: ...cs function TOFGAPC can be used for example for a dropoff delayed output related to the input signal The function contains eight independent timers There is a settable delay in the timer Once the input is activated the output is set immediately When the input is cleared the output stays on until the time set with the Off delay time setting has elapsed t0 t1 dt t2 t3 t5 dt dt Off delay time t1 t4 t...

Page 155: ... status Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status 3 17 5 4 Settings Table 164 TOFGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Off delay time 1 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 5 0 36000...

Page 156: ...activated the output is set after the time set by the On delay time setting has elapsed t0 t0 dt t2 t3 t4 dt dt On delay time t1 t4 t5 Figure 91 Timer operation 3 17 6 3 Signals Table 166 TONGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 False ...

Page 157: ...elay time On delay time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 5 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 6 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 7 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 8 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time 3 17 6 5 Technical data Table 169 TONGAPC Technical da...

Page 158: ...ity over the RESET input The status of each Q output is retained in the nonvolatile memory The individual reset for each Q output is available on the LHMI or through tool via communication Table 170 Truth table for SRGAPC S R Q 0 0 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 3 17 7 3 Signals Table 171 SRGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description S1 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q1 output when set R1 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q...

Page 159: ...hen set S6 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q6 output when set R6 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q6 output when set S7 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q7 output when set R7 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q7 output when set S8 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q8 output when set R8 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q8 output when set Table 172 SRGAPC Output signals Name Type Description Q1 BOOLEAN Q1 status Q2 BOOLEAN Q2 status Q3 BOOLEAN Q3 status Q4 BOOLEAN Q4 ...

Page 160: ...et 0 Cancel Resets Q5 output when set Reset Q6 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q6 output when set Reset Q7 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q7 output when set Reset Q8 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q8 output when set 3 17 8 Move 8 pcs MVGAPC 3 17 8 1 Function block Figure 93 Function block 3 17 8 2 Functionality The move 8 pcs function MVGAPC is used for user logic bits Each input state is dir...

Page 161: ...OOLEAN Q4 status Q5 BOOLEAN Q5 status Q6 BOOLEAN Q6 status Q7 BOOLEAN Q7 status Q8 BOOLEAN Q8 status 3 17 8 4 Settings Table 176 MVGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Description MVGAPC1 Q1 Output description Description MVGAPC1 Q2 Output description Description MVGAPC1 Q3 Output description Description MVGAPC1 Q4 Output description Description MVGAPC...

Page 162: ...nge is from 2147483648 to 2147483647 3 17 9 3 Signals Table 177 MVI4GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 INT32 0 Integer input value 1 IN2 INT32 0 Integer input value 2 IN3 INT32 0 Integer input value 3 IN4 INT32 0 Integer input value 4 Table 178 MVI4GAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 INT32 Integer output value 1 OUT2 INT32 Integer output value 2 OUT3 INT32 Integer outp...

Page 163: ... Analog output range is from 2000000 0 to 2000000 0 If the value of the AIn_VALUE input exceeds the analog input range AOn_VALUE is set to 0 0 If the result of AIn_VALUE multiplied by the Scale ratio n setting exceeds the analog output range AOn_VALUE shows the minimum or maximum value according to analog value range 3 17 10 3 Signals Table 179 SCA4GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description ...

Page 164: ...7 10 4 Settings Table 181 SCA4GAPC settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Scale ratio 1 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 1 Scale ratio 2 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 2 Scale ratio 3 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 3 Scale ratio 4 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 4 Basic functions...

Page 165: ...station control access level is not supported by other protocols than IEC 61850 The actual Local Remote control state is evaluated by the priority scheme on the function block inputs If more than one input is active the input with the highest priority is selected The priority order is off local station remote all The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs Only one output is acti...

Page 166: ...ory is always set by the IEC 61850 client The relay supports station and remote IEC 61850 command originator categories depending on the selected station authority level 3 17 11 4 Station authority level L R Relay s default station authority level is L R In this scenario only local or remote control access is allowed Control access with IEC 61850 command originator category station is interpreted ...

Page 167: ...h IEC 61850 originator category station is interpreted as remote access IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED L R IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED REMOTE LOCAL OFF Figure 98 Station authority is L R L R When station authority level L R L R is used the control access can be selected using R L button or CONTROL function...

Page 168: ...command originator category set to Remote or Station There is no multilevel access IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 station IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 station IED IEC 61850 station IED IEC 61850 station OFF LOCAL REMOTE STATION Figure 99 Station authority is L S R When the station authority level L S R is used the control access can be selected using R L button ...

Page 169: ...m local station or remote location Simultaneous local station or remote control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first completed by the client IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 station IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IEC 61850 remote IED IEC 61850 station IED IEC 618...

Page 170: ...ess R L button CTRL LLN0 LocS ta1 CTRL LLN0 MltL ev L R state CTRL LLN0 Loc KeyHMI Local user IEC 61850 client 2 IEC 61850 client3 CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE 0 CTRL_LOC FALSE FALSE 1 x CTRL_STA FALSE FALSE 3 x CTRL_REM 4 TRUE TRUE 3 x CTRL_REM FALSE TRUE 7 x x CTRL_ALL FALSE TRUE 6 x x x CTRL_ALL 4 TRUE TRUE 5 x x 3 17 11 8 Signals Table 191 CONTROL input signals Name Type Default Description CTRL_OFF B...

Page 171: ...1 LR key 2 Binary input 1 LR key LR control through LR key or binary input Station authority 1 L R 2 L S R 3 L R L R 4 L S S R L S L S R 1 L R Control command originator cate gory usage Control mode 1 On 2 Blocked 5 Off 1 On Enabling and disabling control 3 17 11 10 Monitored data Table 194 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Command response Enum 0 No commands 1 Select open 2 S...

Page 172: ...progress 19 Select timeout 20 Missing authority 21 Close not enabled 22 Open not enabled 23 Internal fault 24 Already close 25 Wrong client 26 RL station allowed 27 RL change 28 Abortion by trip LR state Enum 0 Off 1 Local 2 Remote 3 Station 4 L R 5 L S 6 L S R 7 S R LR state monitoring 3 17 12 Generic control point 16 pcs SPCGAPC Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 172 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 173: ...emote control operations are accepted according to the R L button state Each of the 16 generic control point outputs has the Operation mode Pulse length and Description setting If Operation mode is Toggle the output state is toggled for every control request received If Operation mode is Pulsed the output pulse of a preset duration the Pulse length setting is generated for every control request re...

Page 174: ...ating the blocking mode IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 2 IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 3 IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 4 IN5 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 5 IN6 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 6 IN7 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 7 IN8 BOOLEAN 0 False Input of control point 8 IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Fa...

Page 175: ... Output 3 status O4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status O5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status O6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status O7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status O8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status O9 BOOLEAN Output 9 status O10 BOOLEAN Output 10 status O11 BOOLEAN Output 11 status O12 BOOLEAN Output 12 status O13 BOOLEAN Output 13 status O14 BOOLEAN Output 14 status O15 BOOLEAN Output 15 status O16 BOOLEAN Output 16 status 1MRS758755 C Basic...

Page 176: ...scription Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persis tent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 3 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persis tent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for puls...

Page 177: ...ion mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persis tent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 9 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persis tent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mod...

Page 178: ...nt Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 14 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persis tent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 15 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Puls...

Page 179: ...en the Operation mode is set to Pulsed the corresponding output can be used to produce the predefined length of pulses Once activated the output remains active for the duration of the set pulse length When activated the additional activation command does not extend the length of pulse Thus the pulse needs to be ended before the new activation can occur The Description setting can be used for stori...

Page 180: ...us O3 BOOLEAN Output 3 status O4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status O5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status O6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status O7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status O8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status O9 BOOLEAN Output 9 status O10 BOOLEAN Output 10 status O11 BOOLEAN Output 11 status O12 BOOLEAN Output 12 status O13 BOOLEAN Output 13 status O14 BOOLEAN Output 14 status O15 BOOLEAN Output 15 status O16 BOOLEAN Output 16 status Basic...

Page 181: ...on mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 4 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mod...

Page 182: ...ion mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 11 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 12 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con ...

Page 183: ...inciple The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off SPCLGAPC has the Operation mode Pulse length and Description settings available to control all 16 outputs By default the Operation mode setting is set to Off This disables the controllable signal output SPCLGAPC also has a general setting Loc Rem restriction which enables o...

Page 184: ... Operation mode setting is set to Toggle the output state cannot be changed when the input BLOCK is TRUE If the Operation mode setting is set to Pulsed the activation of the BLOCK input resets the output to the FALSE state 3 17 14 4 Signals Table 201 SPCLGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 202 SPCLGAPC Output s...

Page 185: ...on mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 4 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mod...

Page 186: ...ion mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 11 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con trol point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 12 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle Persistent 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic con ...

Page 187: ...rammable buttons function FKEY4GGIO is a simple interface between the panel and the application The user input from the buttons available on the front panel is transferred to the assigned functionality and the corresponding LED is turned ON or OFF for indication The behavior of each function key in the specific application is configured by connection with other application functions This gives max...

Page 188: ...rue 1 True Visibility of function key text on display On description Function key 1 on On description for function key 1 Off description Function key 1 off Off description for function key 1 On description Function key 2 on On description for function key 2 Off description Function key 2 off Off description for function key 2 On description Function key 3 on On description for function key 3 Off d...

Page 189: ... the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 107 Functional module diagram Up down counter Each rising edge of the UP_CNT input increments the counter value CNT_VAL by one and each rising edge of the DOWN_CNT input decrements the CNT_VAL by one If there is a rising edge at both the inputs UP_CNT and DOWN_CNT the counter value CNT_VAL is unchanged The CNT_VAL is available in the monitored...

Page 190: ...et input for coun ter LOAD BOOLEAN 0 False Load input for coun ter Table 208 UDFCNT Output signals Name Type Description UPCNT_STS BOOLEAN Status of the up counting DNCNT_STS BOOLEAN Status of the down counting 3 17 16 5 Settings Table 209 UDFCNT Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Counter load value 0 2147483647 ...

Page 191: ...istorical load data captured at a periodical time interval demand interval Up to 12 load quantities can be selected for recording and storing in a nonvolatile memory The value range for the recorded load quantities is about eight times the nominal value and values larger than that saturate The recording time depends on a settable demand interval parameter and the amount of quantities selected The ...

Page 192: ...onfiguration in PCM600 the load profile recorder stops recording it and the previously collected data are cleared 3 19 2 2 Length of record The recording capability is about 7 4 years when one quantity is recorded and the demand interval is set to 180 minutes The recording time scales down proportionally when a shorter demand time is selected or more quantities are recorded The recording lengths i...

Page 193: ... 2 3 Uploading of record The protection relay stores the load profile COMTRADE files to the C LDP COMTRADE folder The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 tool or any appropriate computer software that can access the C LDP COMTRADE folder The load profile record consists of two COMTRADE file types the configuration file CFG and the data file DAT The file name is same for both file types To ensure...

Page 194: ...d 3 19 3 Configuration The load profile record can be configured with the PCM600 tool or any tool supporting the IEC 61850 standard The load profile record can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting under the Configuration Load Profile Record menu Each protection relay can be mapped to each of the quantity channels of the load profile record The mapping is done with the Quantity selecti...

Page 195: ...arameters Mem warn level and Mem Alarm level 3 19 4 Signals Table 213 LDPRLRC Output signals Name Type Description MEM_WARN BOOLEAN Recording memory warning status MEM_ALARM BOOLEAN Recording memory alarm sta tus 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 195 ...

Page 196: ...0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 196 REC615 RER615 Tec...

Page 197: ...L3C Quantity Sel 2 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 197 ...

Page 198: ...B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 3 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 198 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 199: ...4 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 4 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 199 ...

Page 200: ...8 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 5 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 200 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 201: ...31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 6 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 201 ...

Page 202: ...UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 202 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 203: ...3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 203 ...

Page 204: ... IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 204 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 205: ...ntity Sel 9 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 27 QB 28 PFB 29 SL1 30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 205 ...

Page 206: ...L1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 10 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 20 UL3B 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 SB 26 PB 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 206 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 207: ...45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 11 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 13 UL2 14 UL3 15 U12B 16 U23B 17 U31B 18 UL1B 19 UL2B 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 207 ...

Page 208: ...9 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Quantity Sel 12 0 Disabled 1 IL1 2 IL2 3 IL3 4 Io 5 IL1B 6 IL2B 7 IL3B 8 IoB 9 U12 10 U23 11 U31 12 UL1 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Table continues on the next page Basic functions 1MRS758755 C 208 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 209: ...30 SL2 31 SL3 32 PL1 33 PL2 34 PL3 35 QL1 36 QL2 37 QL3 38 PFL1 39 PFL2 40 PFL3 41 SL1B 42 SL2B 43 SL3B 44 PL1B 45 PL2B 46 PL3B 47 QL1B 48 QL2B 49 QL3B 50 PFL1B 51 PFL2B 52 PFL3B 53 IL1C 54 IL2C 55 IL3C Mem warning level 0 100 1 0 Set memory warn ing level Mem alarm level 0 100 1 0 Set memory alarm level 1MRS758755 C Basic functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 209 ...

Page 210: ...k Figure 110 Function block 3 20 1 2 Functionality Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH represents LAN A and LAN B redundant Ethernet channels 3 20 1 3 Signals Table 216 RCHLCCH output signals Parameter Values Range Unit Step Defaul t Description CHLIV True False Status of redundant Ethernet chan nel LAN A Otherwise value is False REDCHLIV True False Status of redundant Ethernet chan nel...

Page 211: ... healing Ethernet topologies 3 20 1 5 Monitored data Monitored data is available in four locations Monitoring Communication Ethernet Activity CHLIV_A Monitoring Communication Ethernet Activity REDCHLIV_B Monitoring Communication Ethernet Link statuses LNKLIV_A Monitoring Communication Ethernet Link statuses REDLNKLIV_B 3 20 2 Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH 3 20 2 1 Function block Figure 111 ...

Page 212: ...alues Range Unit Step Defaul t Description CH2LIV True False Status of Ethernet channel X2 LAN Value is True if the port is receiv ing Ethernet frames Valid only when Redundant mode is set to None or port is not one of the redundant ports LAN A or LAN B LNK2LIV Up Down Link status of Ethernet port X2 LAN Table 220 SCHLCCH3 output signals Parameter Values Range Unit Step Defaul t Description CH3LIV...

Page 213: ... for rear port s If port is not used it can be set to Off Port cannot be set to Off when Redundant mode is HSR or PRP and port is one of the redundant ports LAN A or LAN B 3 20 2 5 Monitored data Monitored data is available in six locations Monitoring Communication Ethernet Activity CH1LIV Monitoring Communication Ethernet Activity CH2LIV Monitoring Communication Ethernet Activity CH3LIV Monitorin...

Page 214: ... I_A I_B START OPERATE I_C BLOCK ENA_MULT FPHLPTOC I_A I_B START OPERATE I_C BLOCK ENA_MULT PHIPTOC I_A I_B START OPERATE I_C BLOCK ENA_MULT Figure 112 Function block 4 1 1 3 Functionality The three phase non directional overcurrent protection function F PHxPTOC is used as one phase two phase or three phase non directional overcurrent and short circuit protection The function starts when the curre...

Page 215: ...agram are explained in the next sections Figure 113 Functional module diagram Level detector The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value If the measured value exceeds the set Start value the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the phase selection logic If the ENA_MULT input is active the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult settin...

Page 216: ...elected the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operate delay is exceeded the timer reset state is activated The functionality of the timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating...

Page 217: ...n The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking...

Page 218: ...In addition to this there are 39 curves for recloser applications The DT characteristics can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values ANSI Def Time or IEC Def Time The functionality is identical in both cases The timer characteristics supported by different stages comply with the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicate the characteristics supported by different stages Table ...

Page 219: ... Recloser 6 136 x 7 Recloser 7 152 x 8 Recloser 8 113 x 9 Recloser 8 111 x 10 Recloser 8 x 11 Recloser 9 131 x 12 Recloser 11 141 x 13 Recloser 13 142 x 14 Recloser 14 119 x 15 Recloser 15 112 x 16 Recloser 16 139 x 17 Recloser 17 103 x 18 Recloser 18 151 x 19 Recloser A 101 x 20 Recloser B 117 x 21 Recloser C 133 x 22 Recloser D 116 x Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Protection funct...

Page 220: ...closer Y 120 x 39 Recloser Z 134 x PHIPTOC supports only definite time characteristic For a detailed description of timers see Chapter 11 General function block features in this manual Table 224 Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type F PHLPTOC PHHPTOC Note 1 Immediate x x Available for all operate time curves 2 Def time reset x x Available for all operate time cu...

Page 221: ...levels and time delays F PHxPTOC consists of three protection stages Low F PHLPTOC High PHHPTOC Instantaneous PHIPTOC F PHLPTOC is used for overcurrent protection The function contains several types of time delay characteristics PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC are used for fast clearance of very high overcurrent situations Transformer overcurrent protection The purpose of transformer overcurrent protection is...

Page 222: ...alfunction Figure 115 Example of traditional time selective transformer overcurrent protection The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above scheme become quite long this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in the transformer LV terminal faults In order to improve the performance of the above scheme a multiple stage overcurrent protection with reverse ...

Page 223: ...ction DT definite time IDMT inverse definite minimum time O C stage Operating char Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity HV 3I DT IDMT time selective low very high HV 3I DT blockable time selective high low high HV 3I DT current selective very high low LV 3I DT IDMT time selective low very high LV 3I DT time selective low high LV 3I DT blockable high high In case the bus tie breaker is open...

Page 224: ...s on the setting values can be reduced by using the protection relay s logic which recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and blocks the operation or multiplies the current start value setting of the selected overcurrent stage with a predefined multiplier setting Finally a dependable trip of the overcurrent protection is secured by both a proper selection of the settings and an adequ...

Page 225: ...inimize the effects of severe short circuit faults The influence of the inrush current is taken into consideration by connecting the inrush current detector to the start value multiplying input of the instantaneous stage In this way the start value is multiplied with a predefined setting during the inrush situation and nuisance tripping can be avoided Figure 117 Functionality of numerical multiple...

Page 226: ... False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier Table 227 PHLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier Pr...

Page 227: ... Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier Table 230 FPHLPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 231 PHLPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 232 PHHPTOC Output signals Name Type Descripti...

Page 228: ...NSI Mod inv 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 1 Recloser 1 2 Recloser 2 3 Recloser 3 4 Recloser 4 5 Recloser 5 6 Recloser 6 7 Recloser 7 8 Recloser 8 9 Recloser 8 10 Recloser 8 11 Recloser 9 12 Recloser 11 13 Recloser 13 14 Recloser 14 15 Recl...

Page 229: ...tep Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Num of start pha ses 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for oper ate activation Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Curve parameter A 0 0086 120 0000 1 28 2000 Parameter ...

Page 230: ...cal ing the start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 2 ANSI Very inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 4 ANSI Mod inv 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Pro...

Page 231: ...n group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 5 Wide P to P 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Table 241 PHHPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start val...

Page 232: ... mable curve Curve parameter C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 244 PHHPTOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum ope...

Page 233: ...scription Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 1 1 10 Monitored data Table 248 FPHLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time FPHLPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 249 PHLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of sta...

Page 234: ...uency of the measured current f n 2 Hz F PHLPTOC 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC 1 5 of set value or 0 002 I n at currents in the range of 0 1 10 I n 5 0 of the set value at currents in the range of 10 40 I n Start time 1 2 Minimum Typical Maximum PHIPTOC I Fault 2 set Start val ue 16 ms 11 ms 19 ms 12 ms 23 ms 14 ms Table continues on the next page 1 Measurement mode default...

Page 235: ...vision history Table 253 PHIPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Operate delay time setting C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms for the Operate delay time setting Minimum value changed to 1 00 x In for the Start value setting D Internal improvement E Internal improvement Table 254 PHHPTOC Technical revision histor...

Page 236: ...tection F DPHxPDOC 4 1 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase directional overcur rent protection low stage F DPHLPDOC 3I 67 1 Three phase directional overcur rent protection high stage DPHHPDOC 3I 67 2 4 1 2 2 Function block FDPHLPDOC I_B I_A START OPERATE I2 I_C U_B_BC U_A_AB U1 U_C_CA U2 BLOCK ENA_MULT ...

Page 237: ...mode the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 1 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corr...

Page 238: ...quantity voltage is set with the Min operate voltage setting If the amplitude level of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is below the set level the direction information of the corresponding phase is set to Unknown The polarizing quantity validity can remain valid even if the amplitude of the polarizing quantity falls below the value of the Min operate voltage setting In this case the ...

Page 239: ... below Min operate voltage and hysteresis and the fictive voltage is unusable the fault direction cannot be determined The fictive voltage can be unusable for two reasons The fictive voltage is discarded after Voltage Mem time The phase angle cannot be reliably measured before the fault situation F DPHxPDOC can be forced to the non directional operation with the NON_DIR input When the NON_DIR inpu...

Page 240: ...ogic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting If the phase information matches the Num of start phases setting the phase selection logic activates the timer module Timer Once activated the timer activates the START output Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT When the operation timer has ...

Page 241: ...g should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see Chapter 11 2 1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection in this manual The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time The va...

Page 242: ...ard operation area the Max forward angle setting gives the counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector measured from the Characteristic angle setting In the backward operation area the Max reverse angle setting gives the counterclockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector a measurement from the Ch...

Page 243: ... Table 259 Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION The direction information DIR_X for all phases is unknown 0 unknown The direction information DIR_X for at least one phase is forward none being in reverse 1 forward The direction information DIR_X for at least one phase is reverse none being in for...

Page 244: ... C A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ In an example case of the phasors in a single phase earth fault where the faulted phase is phase A the angle difference between the polarizing quantity U A and operating quantity I A is marked as φ In the self polarization method there is no need to rotate the polarizing quantity Figure 124 Single phase earth fault phase A In an example case of a two phase short circuit failure wh...

Page 245: ... U I AB C RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 A B I A IB U BC UCA ANGLE A U U I I BC CA A B RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 B C I B IC U CA UAB ANGLE B U U I I CA AB B C RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 C A I C IA U AB UBC ANGLE C U U I I AB BC C A RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 The angle difference between the polarizing quantity U BC and operating quantity I A is marked as φ in an example of the phasors in a single phase earth fault where the faulted phase i...

Page 246: ...hasors in a two phase short circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity UAB and operating quantity IB IC marked as φ Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 246 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 247: ...ce This is done automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity the angle difference between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for all fault types ANGLE X U I RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 2 2 Equation 5 This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is U2 1MR...

Page 248: ...ions for calculating angle difference for positive sequence quanti ty polarizing method Faulted phases Used fault current Used polarizing voltage Angle difference A I A U 1 ANGLE A U I A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 B I B U 1 ANGLE B U I B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 120o C I C U 1 ANGLE C U IC RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 120o A B I A IB U 1 ANGLE A U I I A B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 30o B C I B IC U 1 ANGLE B U I I B C RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 90o C A I C IA U...

Page 249: ...ion The change in the network rotating direction affects the phase to phase voltages polarization method where the calculated angle difference needs to be rotated 180 degrees Also when the sequence components are used which are the positive sequence voltage or negative sequence voltage components the calculation of the components are affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same W...

Page 250: ...lculations are needed There are situations with no possibility to have the selectivity with a protection system based on overcurrent protection relays in a closed ring system In some applications the possibility of obtaining the selectivity can be improved significantly if F DPHxPDOC is used This can also be done in the closed ring networks and radial networks with the generation connected to the ...

Page 251: ... distribution for the consumers is secured during network fault situations The power is fed at least from two directions which means that the current direction can be varied The time grading between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays in the time settings In this case it is practical to use the directional overcurrent protection relays to achieve a selective protecti...

Page 252: ...se B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence current U_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage Table continues on the next page Protection functions...

Page 253: ... or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C or phase to phase voltage CA U 1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase se quence voltage U 2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase se quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enabling signal for current multiplier NON...

Page 254: ...e voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enabling signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0 False Forces protection to non directional Table 266 FDPHLPDOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 267 DPHLPDOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN S...

Page 255: ...IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 1 Recloser 1 2 Recloser 2 3 Recloser 3 4 Recloser 4 5 Recloser 5 6 Recloser 6 7 Recloser 7 8 Recloser 8 9 Recloser 8 10 Recloser 8 11 Recloser 9 12 Recloser 11 13 Recloser 13 14 Recloser 14 15 Recloser 15 16 Recloser 16 17 Recloser 17 18 Recloser 18 19 Recloser A 20 Recloser B 21 Recloser C 22 Recloser D 23 Recloser E...

Page 256: ...Range Unit Step Default Description Start value Mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Max forward angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in for ward direction Max reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 80 M...

Page 257: ...cription Minimum operate time 40 60000 ms 1 40 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode Min operate cur rent 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating current Min operate volt age 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage Table 273 DPHLPDOC Group settings Basic Para...

Page 258: ...n Table 274 DPHLPDOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Voltage Mem time 0 3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time Pol quantity 1 Self pol 4 Neg seq volt 5 Cross pol 7 Pos seq volt 5 Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault direction Table 275 DP...

Page 259: ...when dir info is in valid Min operate current 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating current Min operate volt age 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage Table 277 DPHHPDOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 10 40 00 xIn 0 01 0 10 Start value Start value Mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Directional mode 1...

Page 260: ...ings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Curve parameter A 0 0086 120 0000 1 28 2000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0 0000 0 7120 1 0 1217 Parameter B for customer programmable curve Curve parameter C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Para...

Page 261: ...ta Table 281 FDPHLPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction infor mation DIR_A Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase A DIR_B Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backw...

Page 262: ...t 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 282 DPHLPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction infor mation DIR_A Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase A DIR_B Enum 0...

Page 263: ...e C VMEM_USED BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Voltage memory in use status DPHLPDOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 283 DPHHPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Di...

Page 264: ...0 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase B ANGLE_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase C VMEM_USED BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Voltage memory in use status DPHHPDOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 1 2 11 Technical data Table 284 F DPHxPDOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy F DPHLPDOC Depending on the frequency of the current vo...

Page 265: ...eoretical value or 40 ms 3 4 Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 4 1 2 12 Technical revision history Table 285 DPHHPDOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added a new input NON_DIR C Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting D Monitored data VMEM_USED indicating volt age memory use E Internal improvement 1 Measurement mode and...

Page 266: ...ty The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated a need for a thermal overload function for power lines as well A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions and the introduction of the three phase thermal protection for feeders cables and distribution transformers function T1PTTR allows the protected circuit to operate close...

Page 267: ... uses ambient temperature set in Env temperature Set Temperature estimator Thermal counter ENA_MULT ALARM BLK_CLOSE OPERATE BLK_OPR START Max current selector I_A I_B I_C AMB_TEMP Figure 135 Functional module diagram Max current selector The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured TRMS phase current value The selector reports the highest value to the temperatu...

Page 268: ...ted by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature as shown above The ambient temperature can be given a constant value or it can be measured The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a real figure When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level Alarm value the output signal ALARM is set When the component temperature r...

Page 269: ...mperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature measurement connected to T1PTTR is set to Not in use in the X130 RTD function The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial temperature setting parameter This is done in case the protection relay is powered up the function is turned Off and back On or reset through the Clear menu The temperature is a...

Page 270: ...se to the maximum allowed temperature value the protection initiates a trip of the protected line 4 1 3 6 Signals Table 287 T1PTTR Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable Current multi plier BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for oper ate outputs AMB_TEMP FLOAT32 0 The ambie...

Page 271: ...n Current multiplier 1 5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for parallel lines Table 291 T1PTTR Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 292 T1PTTR Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Initial temperature 50 0 100 0 C 0 1 0 0 Temperature raise above ambient te...

Page 272: ...e measured current f n 2 Hz Current measurement 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 I n Operate time accuracy 1 2 0 of the theoretical value or 0 50 s 4 1 3 10 Technical revision history Table 295 T1PTTR Technical revision history Technical revision Change C Removed the Sensor available setting param eter D Added the AMB_TEMP input E Internal improvement F Inter...

Page 273: ...s when the current is less than the set limit Operation time characteristics are according to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs and reset the definite timer if desired 4 1 4 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation o...

Page 274: ...current detection module that monitors the de energized condition of the protected object The module compares the phase currents RMS value to the Start value low setting If all the phase current values are less than the Start value low setting a signal is sent to block the operation of the timer Timer Once activated the timer activates the START output and the phase specific ST_X output The time c...

Page 275: ...bject is disconnected Phase specific start and operate can give a better picture about the evolving faults when one phase has started first and another follows PHPTUC is meant to be a general protection function so that it could be used in other cases too In case of undercurrent based motor protection see the Loss of load protection 4 1 4 6 Signals Table 296 PHPTUC Input signals Name Type Default ...

Page 276: ...asic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Operation mode 1 Three Phase 2 Single Phase 1 Three Phase Number of phases needed to start Table 300 PHPTUC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 1 4 8 Monitored data Table 301 PHPTUC Monitored data Name ...

Page 277: ...earth fault protection F EFxPTOC 4 2 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Non directional earth fault protec tion low stage F EFLPTOC Io 51N 1 Non directional earth fault protec tion high stage EFHPTOC Io 51N 2 Non directional earth fault protec tion instantaneous stage EFIPTOC Io 50N 51N 4 2 1 2 Function block FEFL...

Page 278: ...y using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 139 Functional module diagram Level detector The operating quantity can be selected with the setting Io signal Sel The selectable options are Measured Io and Calculated Io The operating quantity is compared to the set Start value If the measured value exceeds the set Start value the level detector sen...

Page 279: ...te time defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see Chapter 11 2 1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection in this manual...

Page 280: ... referred to as RI and RD One user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable In addition to this there are 39 curves for recloser applications The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values ANSI Def Time or IEC Def Time The functionality is identical in both cases The following characteristics which comply with the list in ...

Page 281: ... 2 135 x 3 Recloser 3 140 x 4 Recloser 4 106 x 5 Recloser 5 114 x 6 Recloser 6 136 x 7 Recloser 7 152 x 8 Recloser 8 113 x 9 Recloser 8 111 x 10 Recloser 8 x 11 Recloser 9 131 x 12 Recloser 11 141 x 13 Recloser 13 142 x 14 Recloser 14 119 x 15 Recloser 15 112 x 16 Recloser 16 139 x 17 Recloser 17 103 x 18 Recloser 18 151 x 19 Recloser A 101 x Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Protectio...

Page 282: ...er Kp 162 x 30 Recloser L 107 x 31 Recloser M 118 x 32 Recloser N 104 x 33 Recloser P 115 x 34 Recloser R 105 x 35 Recloser T 161 x 36 Recloser V 137 x 37 Recloser W 138 x 38 Recloser Y 120 x 39 Recloser Z 134 x EFIPTOC supports only definite time characteristics For a detailed description of timers see Chapter 11 General function block features in this manual Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 282...

Page 283: ...e It also applies to solidly earthed networks and earth fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems such as shunt capacitor bank or shunt reactors and for backup earth fault protection of power transformers Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time delays F EFxPTOC consists of three different protection stages Low F EFLPTOC Hig...

Page 284: ...gnal for cur rent multiplier Table 309 EFIPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier Table 310 FEFLPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 311 EFLPTOC Output signals Name Type Descr...

Page 285: ... curves Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 2 ANSI Very inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 4 ANSI Mod inv 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 1 Recloser 1 102 2 Recloser 2 135 3 Recloser 3 140 4 Recloser...

Page 286: ...8 151 19 Recloser A 101 20 Recloser B 117 21 Recloser C 133 22 Recloser D 116 23 Recloser E 132 24 Recloser F 163 25 Recloser G 121 26 Recloser H 122 27 Recloser J 164 28 Recloser Kg 165 29 Recloser Kp 162 30 Recloser L 107 31 Recloser M 118 32 Recloser N 104 33 Recloser P 115 34 Recloser R 105 35 Recloser T 161 36 Recloser V 137 37 Recloser W 138 Table continues on the next page Protection functi...

Page 287: ...1 0 1217 Parameter B for customer program mable curve Curve parameter C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 317 FEFLPTOC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum...

Page 288: ...e 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 319 EFLPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 320 EFLPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1...

Page 289: ... 322 EFHPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 10 40 00 xIn 0 01 0 10 Start value Start value Mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scal ing the start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Operate delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 5 AN...

Page 290: ...lues Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used meas urement mode Io signal Sel 1 Measured Io 2 Calculated Io 1 Measured Io Selection for used Io signal Table 326 EFIPTOC Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit...

Page 291: ...0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time FEFLPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 330 EFLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time EFLPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 331 EFHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0...

Page 292: ...02 I n at currents in the range of 0 1 10 I n 5 0 of the set value at currents in the range of 10 40 I n Start time 1 2 Minimum Typical Maximum EFIPTOC I Fault 2 set Start val ue I Fault 10 set Start value 16 ms 11 ms 19 ms 12 ms 23 ms 14 ms EFHPTOC and F EFLP TOC I Fault 2 set Start val ue 23 ms 26 ms 29 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Table continues on the next page 1 Measurement mode default dep...

Page 293: ...g C Minimum and default values changed to 20 ms for the Operate delay time setting Minimum value changed to 1 00 x In for the Start value setting D Added a setting parameter for the Measured Io or Calculated Io selection E Internal improvement F Internal improvement Table 335 EFHPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Operate ...

Page 294: ...n low stage F DEFLPDEF Io 67N 1 Directional earth fault protection high stage DEFHPDEF Io 67N 2 4 2 2 2 Function block FDEFLPDEF Io Uo START OPERATE BLOCK ENA_MULT RCA_CTL I2 U2 DEFHPDEF Io Uo START OPERATE BLOCK ENA_MULT RCA_CTL I2 U2 Figure 140 Function block 4 2 2 3 Functionality The earth fault function F DEFxPDEF is used as directional earth fault protection for feeders The function starts an...

Page 295: ...If the ENA_MULT input is active the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting The operating quantity residual current can be selected with the setting Io signal Sel The options are Measured Io and Calculated Io If Measured Io is selected the current ratio for Io channel is given in Configuration Analog inputs Current Io CT If Calculated Io is selected the current ratio is o...

Page 296: ...ue The protection relay does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range Typically the ENA_MULT input is connected to the inrush detection function INRHPAR In case of inrush INRPHAR activates the ENA_MULT input which multiplies Start value by the Start value Mult setting Directional calculation The directional calcul...

Page 297: ...defined as ABC If the network rotating direction is reversed meaning clockwise that is ACB the equation for calculating the negative sequence voltage component need to be changed The network rotating direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation The calculation of the component is affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same When the residual voltage is used as the ...

Page 298: ...he Operation mode setting is Phase angle Phase angle 80 or Phase angle 88 I_OP ER is the measured or calculated residual cur rent If the Operation mode setting is IoSin I_OPER is calculated as follows I_OPER Io x sin ANGLE If the Operation mode setting is IoCos I_OPER is calculated as follows I_OP ER Io x cos ANGLE Monitored data values are accessible on the LHMI or through tools via communication...

Page 299: ...e in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influen...

Page 300: ...arizing quantity Example 1 The Phase angle mode is selected compensated network φRCA 0 deg Characteristic angle 0 deg Figure 142 Definition of the relay characteristic angle RCA 0 degrees in a compensated network Example 2 The Phase angle mode is selected solidly earthed network φRCA 60 deg Characteristic angle 60 deg Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 300 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 301: ...y characteristic angle RCA 60 degrees in a solidly earthed network Example 3 The Phase angle mode is selected isolated network φRCA 90 deg Characteristic angle 90 deg 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 301 ...

Page 302: ... degrees compared to the polarizing voltage Consequently the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set to 90 degrees and the operation criteria to IoSin or Phase angle The width of the operating sector in the phase angle criteria can be selected with the settings Min forward angle Max forward angle Min reverse angle or Max reverse angle Figure 145 illustrates a simplified equivalent circuit for...

Page 303: ...ction relays In this case the selectivity is based on the measurement of the active current component The magnitude of this component is often small and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment When measuring the resistive part of the residual current the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set to 0 degrees and the operation criteria to IoCos or Phase an...

Page 304: ...in Actual operation mode Iosin Actual operation mode Iocos Iocos Actual operation mode Iocos Actual operation mode Iosin Table 340 Characteristic angle control in phase angle operation mode Characteristic angle setting RCA_CTL FALSE RCA_CTL TRUE 90 φ RCA 90 φ RCA 0 0 φ RCA 0 φ RCA 90 Use of the extended phase angle characteristic The traditional method of adapting the directional earth fault prote...

Page 305: ...alue is 170 degrees Min reverse angle in case Directional mode is set to Reverse The Max forward angle setting should be set to cover the possible measurement inaccuracies of current and voltage transformers a typical value is 80 degrees Max reverse angle in case Directional mode is set to Reverse Figure 147 Extended operation area in directional earth fault protection 4 2 2 6 Measurement modes Th...

Page 306: ...the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values ANSI Def Time or IEC Def Time The functionality is identical in both cases The following characteristics which comply with the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicate the characteristics supported by different stages Table 342 Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type F DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF 1 AN...

Page 307: ...er 8 113 x 9 Recloser 8 111 x 10 Recloser 8 x 11 Recloser 9 131 x 12 Recloser 11 141 x 13 Recloser 13 142 x 14 Recloser 14 119 x 15 Recloser 15 112 x 16 Recloser 16 139 x 17 Recloser 17 103 x 18 Recloser 18 151 x 19 Recloser A 101 x 20 Recloser B 117 x 21 Recloser C 133 x 22 Recloser D 116 x 23 Recloser E 132 x 24 Recloser F 163 x Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Protection functions ...

Page 308: ...ferent stages Reset curve type F DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note 1 Immediate x x Available for all operate time curves 2 Def time reset x x Available for all operate time curves 3 Inverse reset x x Available only for ANSI and user pro grammable curves 4 2 2 8 Directional earth fault characteristics Phase angle characteristic The operation criterion phase angle is selected with the Operation mode setting us...

Page 309: ...ingly the counterclockwise sector measured from the Characteristic angle setting In the reverse operation area the Max reverse angle setting gives the clockwise sector and the Min reverse angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise sector measured from the complement of the Characteristic angle setting 180 degrees phase shift The relay characteristic angle RCA is set to positive if the oper...

Page 310: ...ng principle of the network The Iosin φ characteristics is used in an isolated network measuring the reactive component of the fault current caused by the earth capacitance The Iocos φ characteristics is used in a compensated network measuring the active component of the fault current The operation criteria Iosin φ and Iocos φ are selected with the Operation mode setting using the values IoSin or ...

Page 311: ...be passed directly to a decisive element which provides the final start and operate signals The I_OPER monitored data gives an absolute value of the calculated current The following examples show the characteristics of the different operation criteria Example 1 Iosin φ criterion selected forward type fault FAULT_DIR 1 Figure 149 Operating characteristic Iosin φ in forward fault The operating secto...

Page 312: ...Figure 150 Operating characteristic Iosin φ in reverse fault Example 3 Iocos φ criterion selected forward type fault FAULT_DIR 1 Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 312 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 313: ...Figure 151 Operating characteristic Iocos φ in forward fault Example 4 Iocos φ criterion selected reverse type fault FAULT_DIR 2 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 313 ...

Page 314: ...ey have a fixed value of 80 degrees The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low current amplitudes When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the nominal current the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side This makes the protection more selective which means that the phase angle measure...

Page 315: ... angle 1 80 deg 70 deg Operating zone Non operating zone 3 of In 1 of In Figure 154 Phase angle 80 amplitude Directional mode Forward Phase angle 88 The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the Operation mode setting using the value Phase angle 88 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 315 ...

Page 316: ...itude is between 1 20 percent of the nominal current the sector limit increases linearly from 73 degrees to 85 degrees If the current amplitude is between 20 100 percent of the nominal current the sector limit increases linearly from 85 degrees to 88 degrees If the current amplitude is more than 100 percent of the nominal current the sector limit is 88 degrees There is no sector rounding on the ot...

Page 317: ... impedance earthing the phase to earth fault current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents In addition the magnitude of the fault current is almost independent of the fault location in the network The function uses the residual current components Iocos φ or Iosin φ according to the earthing method where φ is the angle between the residual current and the reference residual volta...

Page 318: ...l polarizing quantity The polarizing quantity can be rotated 180 degrees by setting the Pol reversal parameter to True or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires Although the Iosin φ operation can be used in solidly earthed networks the phase angle is recommended Connection of measuring transformers in directional earth fault applications The residual current Io can be ...

Page 319: ... 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control Table 347 FDEFLPDEF Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 31...

Page 320: ...OLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for cur rent multiplier RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control Table 349 DEFLPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 350 FDEFLPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 351 DEFHPD...

Page 321: ...18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Operate delay time 50 200000 ms 10 50 Operate delay time Characteristic an gle 179 180 deg 1 90 Characteristic an gle Max forward angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in forward di rection Max reverse angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse di rection Min forward angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase an gle in fo...

Page 322: ...e parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Table 355 DEFLPDEF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Minimum operate time 50 60000 ms 1 50 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Allow Non Dir 0 False 1 True 0 False Allows prot activa tion as non dir when dir info is in valid Meas...

Page 323: ...e 1 Non directional 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext inv 2 ANSI Very inv 3 ANSI Norm inv 4 ANSI Mod inv 5 ANSI Def Time 6 L T E inv 7 L T V inv 8 L T inv 9 IEC Norm inv 10 IEC Very inv 11 IEC inv 12 IEC Ext inv 13 IEC S T inv 14 IEC L T inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 R...

Page 324: ...closer A 101 20 Recloser B 117 21 Recloser C 133 22 Recloser D 116 23 Recloser E 132 24 Recloser F 163 25 Recloser G 121 26 Recloser H 122 27 Recloser J 164 28 Recloser Kg 165 29 Recloser Kp 162 30 Recloser L 107 31 Recloser M 118 32 Recloser N 104 33 Recloser P 115 34 Recloser R 105 35 Recloser T 161 36 Recloser V 137 37 Recloser W 138 38 Recloser Y 120 Table continues on the next page Protection...

Page 325: ...es Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Operation mode 1 Phase angle 2 IoSin 3 IoCos 4 Phase angle 80 5 Phase angle 88 1 Phase angle Operation criteria Enable voltage limit 0 False 1 True 1 True Enable voltage limit Table 358 FDEFLPDEF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step ...

Page 326: ... xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage Correction angle 0 0 10 0 deg 0 1 0 0 Angle correction Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity Io signal Sel 1 Measured Io 2 Calculated Uo 1 Measured Io Selection for used Io signal Uo signal Sel 1 Measured Uo 2 Calculated Uo 1 Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal Pol quantity 3 Zero seq volt 4 Neg seq volt 3 Zero seq volt Referen...

Page 327: ...rt value Table 361 DEFHPDEF Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Operation mode 1 Phase angle 2 IoSin 3 IoCos 4 Phase angle 80 5 Phase angle 88 1 Phase angle Operation criteria Enable voltage limit 0 False 1 True 1 True Enable voltage limit Table 362 DE...

Page 328: ...in operate current 0 005 1 000 xIn 0 001 0 005 Minimum operating current Min operate volt age 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage Correction angle 0 0 10 0 deg 0 1 0 0 Angle correction Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity Io signal Sel 1 Measured Io 2 Calculated Io 1 Measured Io Selection for used Io signal Uo signal Sel 1 Measured Uo 2 Calculated Uo 1 Measu...

Page 329: ...d operating quan tity I_OPER FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Calculated oper ating current DEFLPDEF Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Table 365 FDEFLPDEF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 b...

Page 330: ...Type Values Range Unit Description FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction infor mation ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between operating angle and characteris tic angle ANGLE FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between polarizing...

Page 331: ...um DEFHPDEF I Fault 2 set Start val ue 42 ms 46 ms 49 ms F DEFLPDEF I Fault 2 set Start val ue 58 ms 62 ms 66 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 30 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms 3 Table continues on the next page 1 Measurement mode d...

Page 332: ... Unit added to calculated operating current output I_OPER F Added setting Pol quantity Table 369 F DEFLPDEF Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max forward angle setting Start value step changed to 0 005 C Added a setting parameter for the Measured Io or Calculated Io selection and setting parameter for the Measured Uo Calcula ted Uo or N...

Page 333: ... distribution and sub transmission networks Fault detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients The operating time characteristics are according to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 2 3 4 Operation principle The function can be en...

Page 334: ... Uo is calculated from phase quantities The phase VT ratio is 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V In this case Calculated Uo is selected The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage are obtained from VT ratios entered in Residual voltage Uo Configuration Analog inputs Voltage 3U VT 20 000 kV 100 V The residual voltage start value of 1 0 Un corresponds to 1 0 20 000 kV 20 000 kV in the primar...

Page 335: ...he protected feeder in the background network If the direction has no importance the value Non directional can be selected The detected fault direction FAULT_DIR is available in the monitored data view In the Transient EF mode when the start transient of the fault is detected and the Uo level exceeds the set Voltage start value Timer 1 is activated Timer 1 is kept activated until the Uo level exce...

Page 336: ...itional transient is detected during the drop off cycle The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient peak In case there is no OPERATE activation for example the fault disappears momentarily START stays activated until the Reset delay time elapses that is reset takes place if time between transients is more than Reset delay time After OPERATE activation a fixed pulse length of...

Page 337: ...tivated Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal a...

Page 338: ...iated as the phase to earth voltage exceeds the reduced insulation level of the fault point and mostly extinguishes itself as the fault current drops to zero for the first time as shown in Figure 162 As a result very short transients that is rapid changes in the form of spikes in residual current Io and in residual voltage Uo can be repeatedly measured Typically the fault resistance in case of an ...

Page 339: ...s Figure 163 Example of earth fault transients including discharge and charge transient components when a permanent fault occurs in a 20 kV network in phase C 4 2 3 6 Signals Table 370 INTRPTEF Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 371 INTRPTEF Output signals N...

Page 340: ...ed Uo 2 Calculated Uo 1 Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal Table 374 INTRPTEF Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 40 60000 ms 1 500 Reset delay time Peak counter limit 2 20 1 2 Min requirement for peak counter before start in IEF mode Min operate current 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating current for transi ent detector 4 2...

Page 341: ...m operate current setting is add ed Correction in IEC 61850 mapping DO BlkEF renamed to InhEF Minimum value changed from 0 01 to 0 10 default changed from 0 01 to 0 20 for the Voltage start value setting Minimum value changed from 0 ms to 40 ms for the Reset delay time setting D Voltage start value description changed from Voltage start value for transient EF to Volt age start value since the star...

Page 342: ... plane The supported characteristics include overadmittance oversusceptance overconductance or any combination of the three The directionality of the oversusceptance and overconductance criteria can be defined as forward reverse or non directional and the boundary lines can be tilted if required by the application This allows the optimization of the shape of the admittance characteristics for any ...

Page 343: ...n Configuration Analog inputs Voltage 3U VT Example 1 Uo is measured from open delta connected VTs 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V 100 3 V In this case Measured Uo is selected The nominal values for residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage Uo Configuration Analog inputs Voltage Uo VT 11 547 kV 100 V The residual voltage start value of 1 0 Un corresponds to 1 0 11 547 k...

Page 344: ... frequency phasors The Admittance Clc mode setting defines the calculation mode Admittance Clc mode Normal Yo Io Uo fault fault Equation 11 Admittance Clc mode Delta Yo Io Io Uo Uo Io Uo fault prefault fault prefault Equation 12 Yo Calculated neutral admittance Siemens Io fault Residual current during the fault Amperes Uo fault Residual voltage during the fault Volts Io prefault Prefault residual ...

Page 345: ...mittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign The measured admittance is dominantly reactive the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the feeder Theoretically the measured admittance is located in the third quadrant in the admittance plane close to the im Yo axis see Figure 166 The result of Equation 13 is valid regardless of the neutral earthing ...

Page 346: ...ance of the protected feeder Y Bg Phase to earth admittance of the background network For example in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the earth fault current in the protected feeder being 10 A Rf 0 Ω the theoretical value for the measured admittance during an earth fault in the reverse direction that is outside the protected feeder can be calculated Yo j I U j A kV j eFd ph 10 15 ...

Page 347: ...ation 18 I j I K I U Rcc eTot eFd ph 1 Equation 19 High resistance earthed network Yo Y Y Bgtot Rn Equation 20 I j I I U Rn eTot eFd ph Equation 21 Y Bgtot Sum of the phase to earth admittances YBgA YBgB YBgC of the background network Y CC Admittance of the earthing arrangement compensation coil and parallel resistor I Rcc Rated current of the parallel resistor I eFd Magnitude of the earth fault c...

Page 348: ...nce plane depending on the compensation degree see Figure 167 Before the parallel resistor is connected the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the coil As they are typically small the resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the discrimination of the fault and its direction based on the measured conductan...

Page 349: ...Forward Fault Lcc Rcc IeFd IeTot IeTot IeFd Uo Rn Protected feeder Background network YFd YBg Figure 167 Admittance calculation during a forward fault When the network is fully compensated in compensated networks theoretically during a forward fault the imaginary part of the measured admittance equals the susceptance of the protected feeder with a negative sign The discrimination between a forward...

Page 350: ...tor should be considered when setting the admittance characteristic When a high sensitivity of the protection is required the residual current should be measured with a cable ring core CT that is the Ferranti CT Also the use of the sensitive Io input should be considered The residual voltage measurement should be done with an open delta connection of the three single pole insulated voltage transfo...

Page 351: ...The most typical characteristics are highlighted and explained in details in Chapter 4 2 4 5 Neutral admittance characteristics Operation is achieved when the calculated neutral admittance Yo moves outside the characteristic the operation area is marked with gray The settings defining the admittance characteristics are given in primary milliSiemens mS The conversion equation for the admittance fro...

Page 352: ...Figure 168 Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode Non directional Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 352 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 353: ...Figure 169 Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode Forward 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 353 ...

Page 354: ...Figure 170 Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode Reverse Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 354 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 355: ...e Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 2 4 5 Neutral admittance characteristics The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a suitable margin However more detailed setting value selection principles...

Page 356: ...is the boundary line is a vertical line in the admittance plane A positive tilt value rotates the boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis In case of non directional conductance criterion the Conductance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves over either of the boundary lines The non directional ...

Page 357: ...characteristic Left figure classical forward directional overconductance criterion Middle figure characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle Right figure characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to Bo and Directional mode to Forward The ...

Page 358: ...ircle susceptance are 0 0 mS and Conductance tilt Ang equals zero degrees that is the characteristic is a combination of an origin centered circle with two vertical overconductance boundary lines A positive tilt value for the Conductance tilt Ang setting rotates boundary lines counterclockwise from the vertical axis In case of the non directional conductance criterion the Conductance reverse setti...

Page 359: ... defined with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings By default the tilt angles are zero degrees that is the boundary lines are straight lines in the admittance plane A positive Conductance tilt Ang value rotates the overconductance boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis A positive Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line counterclockw...

Page 360: ...al oversusceptance characteristic The non directional overconductance and non directional oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and selectivity when the characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin The sign of the admittance characteristic settings should be considered based on the location of characteristic boundary in the a...

Page 361: ...e full resonance and when the parallel resistor of the coil is not connected The residual overvoltage based start condition for the admittance protection enables a multistage protection principle For example one instance of EFPADM could be used for alarming to detect faults with a high fault resistance using a relatively low value for the Voltage start value setting Another instance of EFPADM coul...

Page 362: ...an the absolute value of the capacitive reactance of the network Parallel resistor of the compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth fault current A Rf 0 ohm Residual voltage Resonance K 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth fault current A Rf 0 ohm Residual voltage Over Under...

Page 363: ... resistor Yo Y Y j B Bgtot CC 1 73 mS Equation 28 Where the imaginary part of the admittance B depends on the tuning of the coil compensation degree The admittance characteristic is selected to be the combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic Box characteristics with four boundary lines Operation mode Go Bo Directional mode Non directional The admittance characteristic is set to ...

Page 364: ... reverse This setting should be set based on the value of the maximum earth fault current produced by the feeder considering possible feeder topology changes with a security margin This ensures that the admittance operating point stays inside the Box characteristics during outside fault The recommended security margin should not be lower than 1 5 Susceptance reverse 10 A 1 5 15 kV sqrt 3 1 73 mS C...

Page 365: ... value 0 01 2 00 xUn 0 01 0 15 Voltage start value Directional mode 1 Non directional 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Operation mode 1 Yo 2 Go 3 Bo 4 Yo Go 5 Yo Bo 6 Go Bo 7 Yo Go Bo 1 Yo Operation criteria Operate delay time 60 200000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time Circle radius 0 05 500 00 mS 0 01 1 00 Admittance circle radius Circle conductance 500 00 500 00 mS 0 01 0 00 Admittance ...

Page 366: ...ettings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 384 EFPADM Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Admittance Clc mode 1 Normal 2 Delta 1 Normal Admittance calcula tion mode Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity Min ...

Page 367: ...ed 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 2 4 10 Technical data Table 386 EFPADM Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 At the frequency f f n 1 0 or 0 01 mS In range of 0 5 100 mS Start time 2 Minimum Typical Maximum 56 ms 60 ms 64 ms Reset time 40 ms Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value of 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 2 5 Harmonics based...

Page 368: ...comparing the harmonics earth fault current measurements The function starts when the harmonics content of the earth fault current exceeds the set limit The operation time characteristic is either definite time DT or inverse definite minimum time IDMT If the horizontal communication is used for the exchange of current values between the protection relays the function operates according to the DT c...

Page 369: ...z that is summing the harmonic components of the network from the second harmonic The output of the filter later referred to as the harmonics current is fed to the Level detector and Current comparison modules The harmonics current I_HARM_RES is available in the monitored data view The value is also sent over horizontal communication to the other protection relays on the parallel feeders configure...

Page 370: ...f the locally measured harmonics current is higher than I_REF_RES the enabling signal is sent to Timer If the locally measured harmonics current is lower than I_REF_RES the fault is not in that feeder The detected situation blocks Timer internally and simultaneously also the BLKD_I_REF output is activated The module also supervises the communication channel validity which is reported to the Timer ...

Page 371: ...start duration may change substantially depending on the user settings When the programmable IDMT curve is selected the operation time characteristics are defined with the Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is exceeded the Timer reset ...

Page 372: ...nication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the who...

Page 373: ... three analog GOOSE receivers 4 2 5 6 Signals Table 388 HAEFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode I_REF_RES FLOAT32 0 0 Reference current Table 389 HAEFPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 2 5 7 Settings 1MRS758755 C Protection functions RE...

Page 374: ...e type Table 391 HAEFPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 100 200000 ms 10 500 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Enable reference use 0 False 1 True 0 False Enable using cur rent reference from other IEDs instead of stand al...

Page 375: ... start time operate time I_HARM_RES FLOAT32 0 0 30000 0 A Calculated har monics current BLKD_I_REF BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Current compari son status indi cator HAEFPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 2 5 9 Technical data Table 395 HAEFPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 2 Hz 5 of the set value ...

Page 376: ...d earth fault protection functions for example the IoCos mode in the directional earth fault protection function DEFxPDEF WPWDE measures the earth fault power 3UoIoCosφ and gives an operating signal when the residual current Io residual voltage Uo and the earth fault power exceed the set limits and the angle φ between the residual current and the residual voltage is inside the set operating sector...

Page 377: ...izing quantity can be selected with the setting Pol signal Sel The selectable options are Measured Uo and Calculated Uo When the angle between operating quantity and polarizing quantity after considering the Characteristic angle setting is in the operation sector the module sends an enabling signal to Level detector The directional operation is selected with the Directional mode setting Either the...

Page 378: ... sensitivity Characteristic angle can be set anywhere between 179 to 180 Thus the effective phase angle ϕ for calculating the residual power considering characteristic angle is according to the equation φ Uo Io Characteristic angle Equation 29 In addition the characteristic angle can be changed via the control signal RCA_CTL The RCA_CTL input is used in the compensated networks where the compensat...

Page 379: ...nly when the correct angle calculation can be made If the magnitude of the operating quantity or polarizing quantity is not high enough the direction calculation is not reliable Hence the magnitude of the operating quantity is compared to the Min operate current setting and the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to Min operate voltage and if both the operating quantity and polarizing...

Page 380: ... is calculated continuously and it is available in the monitored data view The power is given in relation to nominal power calculated as Pn Un In where Un and In are obtained from the entered voltage transformer and current transformer ratios entered and depend on the Io signal Sel and Uo signal Sel settings Level detector Level detector compares the magnitudes of the measured operating quantity r...

Page 381: ...3U VT Io CT Pn 3U VT 3I CT Example 1 Io is measured with cable core CT 100 1A and Uo is measured from open delta connected VTs 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V 100 3 V In this case Measured Io and Measured Uo are selected The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios Residual current Io Configuration Analog inputs Current Io CT 100 A 1 A Residual voltage ...

Page 382: ...tion and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal...

Page 383: ...Figure 191 Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for S ref set at 0 15 xPn 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 383 ...

Page 384: ...oil L If the coil is tuned exactly to the system capacitance the fault current has only a resistive component This is due to the resistances of the coil and distribution lines together with the system leakage resistances R 0 Often a resistor R L in parallel with the coil is used for increasing the fault current When a single phase to earth fault occurs the capacitance of the faulty phase is bypass...

Page 385: ...t errors and current transformer amplitude are checked first It is not recommended to use the directional wattmetric protection in case of a ring or meshed system as the wattmetric requires a radial power flow to operate The relay characteristic angle needs to be set based on the system earthing In an unearthed network that is when the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances between ...

Page 386: ...e Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control Table 398 WPWDE Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 2 6 9 Settings WPWDE Group settings Table 399 WPWDE Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Cur...

Page 387: ...cts used cur rent measurement mode Correction angle 0 0 10 0 deg 0 1 2 0 Angle correction Min operate current 0 010 1 000 xIn 0 001 0 010 Minimum operating current Min operate volt age 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating voltage Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity Io signal Sel 1 Measured Io 2 Calculated Io 1 Measur...

Page 388: ...acy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz Current and voltage 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Power 3 of the set value or 0 002 Pn Start time 1 2 Typically 63 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Operate time accuracy in IDMT mode 5 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonic...

Page 389: ...ontain non fundamental frequency components The sensitivity that can be achieved is comparable with traditional fundamental frequency based methods such as IoCos IoSin DEFxPDEF Watt Varmetric WPWDE and neutral admittance EFPADM MFADPSDE is capable of detecting faults with dominantly fundamental frequency content as well as transient intermittent and restriking earth faults MFADPSDE can be used as ...

Page 390: ...of U o 1 exceeds setting Voltage start value an earth fault is detected The GFC module reports the exceeded value to the Fault direction determination module and Operation logic The reporting is referenced as General Fault Criterion release The setting Voltage start value defines the basic sensitivity of the MFADPSDE function To avoid unselective start or operation Voltage start value must always ...

Page 391: ...ce conductance and susceptance Y I U G j B o o 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 3 Equation 32 Y0 1 The fundamental frequency neutral admittance phasor I0 1 The fundamental frequency zero sequence current phasor I I I A B C 1 1 1 3 U0 1 The fundamental frequency zero sequence voltage phasor U U U A B C 1 1 1 3 Go 1 The fundamental frequency conductance Re Y0 1 Bo 1 The fundamental frequency susceptance Im Y0 1 Harm...

Page 392: ...mic the fault direction is calculated using a special filtering algorithm Cumulative Phasor Summing CPS technique This filtering method is advantageous during transient intermittent and restriking earth faults with dominantly non sinusoidal or transient content It is equally valid during continuous stable earth faults The concept of CPS is illustrated in Figure 196 It is the result of adding value...

Page 393: ...ction is defined with setting Directional mode as Forward or Reverse The operation characteristic is defined by tilted operation sector as illustrated in Figure 197 The characteristic provides universal applicability that is it is valid both in compensated and unearthed networks also if the compensation coil is temporarily switched off The tilt of the operation sector is defined with setting Tilt ...

Page 394: ...alid regardless of network s actual compensation degree Harmonics would turn the phasor align to the positive Im Yo axis Phasors 3 and 4 depict the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of higher ohmic earth fault in the protected feeder without harmonics in the fault quantities when the network is compensated As no harmonic components are present the phase angle of the accumulate...

Page 395: ...lation during a cross country fault MFADPSDE is then able to adapt to possible fault direction change more rapidly if single phase earth fault still persists in the system after the other faulty feeder has been tripped cross country fault has been transformed back to a single phase earth fault The direction of the MFADPSDE function is supervised by a settable current magnitude threshold The operat...

Page 396: ... magnitude supervision is based on either the Adaptive or Amplitude methods When Adaptive is selected the method adapts the principle of magnitude supervision automatically to the system earthing condition In case the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is greater than 45 degrees the set minimum operate current threshold is compared to the amplitude of Io stab 1 see Figure 198 In case...

Page 397: ... network corresponding to the resistive current of the parallel resistor of the coil and the natural losses of the system typically in order of 1 5 of the total capacitive earth fault current of the network p security factor 0 5 0 7 This setting should be set based on the total resistive earth fault current of the network including the parallel resistor of the coil and the network losses It must b...

Page 398: ...s especially phase displacement Transient detector The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual current and zero sequence voltage signals Whenever transient is detected this is indicated with the PEAK_IND output When the number of detected transients equals or exceeds the Peak counter limit setting without the function being reset depending on the drop off time se...

Page 399: ...tart value defines the basic sensitivity of the MFADPSDE function In General EF mode the operate timer is started in the following conditions Earth fault is detected by the General Fault Criterion GFC Fault direction equals Directional mode setting Estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds the set Min operate current level The START output is activated once Start delay ti...

Page 400: ...onstant of post fault oscillations is very long network losses and damping is low To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during intermittent or restriking earth fault the Reset delay time should be set to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between fault spikes obtained at full resonance condition Recommended value is at least 300 ms Figure 200 Operation in Gen...

Page 401: ...s not valid in the Alarming EF mode Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions are not valid In case the fault is transient and self extinguishes START output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer setting Reset delay time In case detection of temporary earth faults is not desired the activation of START output can be delayed with setting Start delay time To keep the oper...

Page 402: ...in Intermittent EF mode The application of Intermittent EF mode is limited to low ohmic intermittent or restriking earth faults In the Intermittent EF mode the operate timer is started when the following conditions are met Transient is detected by the Transient detector indicated with PEAK_IND output Earth fault is detected by the GFC at time of transient Fault direction equals Directional mode se...

Page 403: ...ent exceeds set Minimum operate current setting The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient Function is reset if time between current peaks is more that Reset delay time or if the General Fault Criterion release is reset After OPERATE output activation START and OPERATE outputs are reset immediately at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release that is when zero seq...

Page 404: ...ommunication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPER...

Page 405: ...y time elapses Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the BLK_EF output and resets Timer Figure 203 Activation of BLK_EF output indication that fault is located opposite to the set operate direction 4 2 7 5 Application MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth fault protection for high impedance earthed networks that is for compensated unearthed and high resistance earthed systems It can be...

Page 406: ...inbuilt transient detector can be used to identify restriking or intermittent earth faults and discriminate them from permanent or continuous earth faults The direction of MFADPSDE can be set as forward or reverse The operation characteristic is defined by a tilted operation sector which is universally valid both in unearthed and compensated networks The tilt of the operation sector should be sele...

Page 407: ...on indication 4 2 7 7 Settings MFADPSDE Group settings Table 406 MFADPSDE Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Voltage start value 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 10 Voltage start value Operate delay time 60 1200000 ms 10 500 Operate delay time Table 407 MFADPSDE Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range...

Page 408: ...r limit 2 20 1 2 Peak counter limit for restriking EF Start delay time 30 60000 ms 1 30 Start delay time Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 500 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity 4 2 7 8 Monitored data MFADPSDE Monitored data Table 410 MFADPSDE Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate ti...

Page 409: ...pically 35 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Operate time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 3 Unbalance protection 4 3 1 Negative sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 4 3 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Negative sequence overcurrent pro tection NSPTOC I2 46 1 Includes the delay of the signal output contact...

Page 410: ... DT mode the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 3 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The ...

Page 411: ... the Reset delay time setting With the reset curve type Inverse reset the reset time depends on the current during the drop off situation The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed The Inverse reset selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves If another operating curve type is selected an immediate reset occurs during the drop...

Page 412: ...tage side of a delta wye connected power transformer for earth faults taking place on the wye connected low voltage side If an earth fault occurs on the wye connected side of the power transformer negative sequence current quantities appear on the delta connected side of the power transformer The most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection is probably rotating machines...

Page 413: ...inv 15 IEC Def Time 17 Programmable 18 RI type 19 RD type 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 415 NSPTOC Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 416 NSPTOC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Descrip...

Page 414: ...erate time NSPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 3 1 9 Technical data Table 419 NSPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f n 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n Start time 1 2 Minimum Typical Maximum I Fault 2 set Start value I Fault 10 set Start value 23 ms 15 ms 26 ms 18 ms 28 ms 20 ms Reset time Typi...

Page 415: ... 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC I2 I1 46PD 4 3 2 2 Function block Figure 206 Function block 4 3 2 3 Functionality The phase discontinuity protection function PDNSPTOC is used for detecting unbalance situations caused by broken conductors The function starts and operates when the unbalance current I 2 I 1 exceeds the set limit To prevent f...

Page 416: ... reports the exceeding of the value to the timer Min current check The min current check module checks whether the measured phase currents are above the set Min phase current At least one of the phase currents needs to be above the set limit to enable the level detector module Timer Once activated the timer activates the START output The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation ti...

Page 417: ...ns the phase discontinuity in one phase can cause an increase of zero sequence voltage and short overvoltage peaks and also oscillation in the corresponding phase PDNSPTOC is a three phase protection with DT characteristic designed for detecting broken conductors in distribution and subtransmission networks The function is applicable for both overhead lines and underground cables The operation of ...

Page 418: ...cription I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode Table 422 PDNSPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 3 2 7 Settings Protection functions 1MRS758755 C 418 REC6...

Page 419: ...current 0 05 0 30 xIn 0 01 0 10 Minimum phase current 4 3 2 8 Monitored data PDNSPTOC Monitored data Table 426 PDNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time RATIO_I2_I1 FLOAT32 0 00 999 99 Measured cur rent ratio I2 I1 PDNSPTOC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 3 2 9 Technical data Table 427 PDN...

Page 420: ...E C37 2 device number Three phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U 59 4 4 1 2 Function block Figure 209 Function block 4 4 1 3 Functionality The three phase overvoltage protection function PHPTOV is applied on power system elements such as generators transformers motors and power lines to protect the system from excessive voltages that could damage the insulation and cause insulation breakdown The...

Page 421: ...r preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly differs from the Start value setting After leaving the hysteresis area the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting phase to earth or phase to phase voltages for protection For the voltage IDMT operatio...

Page 422: ...s are selected the reset timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded If the drop off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time the Timer is reset and the START output is deactivated When the IDMT operate time curve is selected the functionality of the Timer in the drop off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve Type of time reset and Reset delay time settings ...

Page 423: ... is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum operate time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see Chapter 11 3 1 IDMT curves for overvoltage protection in this manual The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates th...

Page 424: ...urve types Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 17 Inv Curve A 18 Inv Curve B 19 Inv Curve C 20 Programmable 4 4 1 6 Application Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network or due to prolonged power frequency overvoltages Surge arresters are used to protect the network against the transient overvoltages but the relay s protection function is us...

Page 425: ...or acti vating the blocking mode Table 432 PHPTOV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4 4 1 8 Settings PHPTOV Group settings Table 433 PHPTOV Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 1 60 xUn 0 01 1 10 Start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay ...

Page 426: ...eter B for customer program mable curve Curve parameter C 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Parameter C for customer program mable curve Curve parameter D 0 000 60 000 1 0 000 Parameter D for customer program mable curve Curve parameter E 0 000 3 000 1 1 000 Parameter E for customer program mable curve Voltage selection 1 phase to earth 2 phase to phase 2 phase to phase Parameter to select phase or phase to phase vol...

Page 427: ... ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms 3 Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 4 1 11 Technical revision history Table 439 PHPTOV Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3 0 to 10 0 and default value ...

Page 428: ...ervice under low voltage conditions PHPTUV includes a settable value for the detection of undervoltage either in a single phase two phases or three phases The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timer or the function itself if desired 4 4 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding par...

Page 429: ...value is set to True and the blocking level can be set with the Voltage block value setting Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected If the number of faulty phases match with the set Num of start phases the phase selection logic activates the Timer Timer Once activated ...

Page 430: ...eset delay time Instantaneous reset Operation timer is Reset instan taneously when drop off occurs Immediate Setting has no effect Setting has no effect Frozen timer Operation timer is frozen during drop off Def time reset Freeze Op tim er Operate timer is reset after the setReset delay time has elapsed Linear decrease Operation timer value linearly de creases during the drop off sit uation Def ti...

Page 431: ...on time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting For more information see Chapter 11 2 1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection in this manual The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is available in the Monitored data view Blocking...

Page 432: ...aused by abnormal operation or a fault in the power system PHPTUV can be used in combination with overcurrent protections Other applications are the detection of a no voltage condition for example before the energization of a high voltage line or an automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout PHPTUV is also used to initiate voltage correction measures such as insertion of shunt capacitor banks to...

Page 433: ...arameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 0 05 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 Start value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 60 300000 ms 10 60 Operate delay time Operating curve type 5 ANSI Def Time 15 IEC Def Time 21 Inv Curve A 22 Inv Curve B 23 Programmable 15 IEC Def Time Selection of time delay curve type Table 445 PHPTUV...

Page 434: ... to earth 2 phase to phase 2 phase to phase Parameter to select phase or phase to phase voltages Table 447 PHPTUV Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 60 60000 ms 1 60 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Curve Sat Relative 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve dis continui...

Page 435: ...ession of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 4 4 2 11 Technical revision history Table 450 PHPTUV Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3 0 to 10 0 and default value changed from 2 0 to 0 0 D Added setting Type of time reset 4 4 3 Residual overvoltage protec...

Page 436: ...itself if desired 4 4 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of ROVPTOV can be described by using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 216 Functional module diagram Level detector The residual voltage is compared to the set Start ...

Page 437: ...the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operate timer resets and the START output is deactivated The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the bl...

Page 438: ... three phase voltage This voltage can also be measured by a single phase voltage transformer located between a transformer star point and earth or by using an open delta connection of three single phase voltage transformers 4 4 3 6 Signals Table 451 ROVPTOV Input signals Name Type Default Description Uo SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for acti vating the blocking mode ...

Page 439: ...pending on the frequency of the measured voltage f n 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n Start time 1 2 U Fault 2 set Start value Minimum Typical Maximum 48 ms 51 ms 54 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 1 Residual v...

Page 440: ...voltage protection function NSPTOV is used to detect negative sequence overvoltage conditions NSPTOV is used for the protection of machines The function starts when the negative sequence voltage exceeds the set limit NSPTOV operates with the definite time DT characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs the definite timer or the function it...

Page 441: ...king mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the pre...

Page 442: ...r if the NSPTOV operation has started This scheme also prevents connecting the machine to the network if the phase sequence of the network is not correct An appropriate value for the setting parameter Voltage start value is approximately 3 percent of U n A suitable value for the setting parameter Operate delay time depends on the application If the NSPTOV operation is used as backup protection the...

Page 443: ...ristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured f n 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 U n Start time 1 2 U Fault 1 1 set Start value U Fault 2 0 set Start value Minimum Typical Maximum 33 ms 24 ms 35 ms 26 ms 37 ms 28 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ...

Page 444: ...bedded plant from a fault line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to start an overcurrent function but high enough to maintain the arc Fast isolation of all the fault current sources is necessary for a successful autoreclosure from the network end circuit breaker The function starts when the positive sequence voltage drops below the set limit PSPTUV operates with the definite time ...

Page 445: ...of the start situation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication in...

Page 446: ...t the power station from the risks of the islanding conditions since that requires a higher setting value The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is unable to operate as a generator with the network frequency but enters into an unstable condition in which it operates by turns as a generator and a motor Such a condition stresses the generator thermally and mechanically This ...

Page 447: ... Table 471 PSPTUV Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 472 PSPTUV Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Relative hysteresis 1 0 5 0 0 1 4 0 Relative hysteresis for operation 4 4 5 8 Monitored data PSPTUV Monitored dat...

Page 448: ... where n 2 3 4 5 4 4 5 10 Technical revision history Table 475 PSPTUV Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C Internal improvement D Internal improvement 4 5 Frequency protection 4 5 1 Frequency protection FRPFRQ 4 5 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Frequency protection FRPFRQ f f df dt 81 1 Sta...

Page 449: ... timer or the function itself if desired 4 5 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of FRPFRQ can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections F BLOCK Operate logic Freq detection df dt detection Blocking logic START ST_FRG ST...

Page 450: ...riteria are selected with the Operation mode setting Table 476 Operation modes for operation logic Operation mode Description Freq The function operates independently as the underfrequency Freq protection function When the measured frequency is below the set value of the Start value Freq setting the module activates the START and STR_UFRQ outputs The time characteristic is according to DT When the...

Page 451: ...vated If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm df dt setting the operate timer resets and the START and STR_FRG outputs are deactivated The OPR_UFRQ out put is not active when this operation mode is used Freq df dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods When the measured frequency exceeds the set val ue of the Start value Freq setting the frequency gradie...

Page 452: ...from the OPR_OFRQ or OPR_FRG output If the frequency gradient restores before the module operates the reset timer is acti vated If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm df dt setting the operate timer resets and the STR_FRG output is deactivated If the frequency restores before the module operates the reset timer is activated If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm...

Page 453: ... loses its stability The underfrequency is applicable in all situations where a reliable detection of a low fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed The low fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the generated power is too low to meet the demands of the load connected to the power grid The underfrequency can occur as a result of the overload of generators operating in a...

Page 454: ...OLEAN Start signal for underfre quency ST_FRG BOOLEAN Start signal for frequency gradient 4 5 1 7 Settings FRPFRQ Group settings Table 480 FRPFRQ Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 1 Freq 2 Freq 3 df dt 4 Freq df dt 5 Freq df dt 6 Freq OR df dt 7 Freq OR df dt 1 Freq Frequency protec tion operation mode selection Start value Freq 0 9000 1 2000 ...

Page 455: ...df dt 0 60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for rate of change 4 5 1 8 Monitored data Table 483 FRPFRQ Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration ST_DUR_OFRQ FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration ST_DUR_UFRQ FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration ST_DUR_FRG FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration FRPFRQ Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4...

Page 456: ...unction block 4 5 2 3 Functionality The load shedding and restoration function LSHDPFRQ is capable of performing load shedding based on underfrequency and the rate of change of the frequency The load that is shed during the frequency disturbance can be restored once the frequency has stabilized to the normal level The measured system frequency is compared to the set value to detect the underfreque...

Page 457: ...bance The restoration is possible manually or automatically The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 5 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of LSHDPFRQ can be described using a module diagram...

Page 458: ... df dt detection is activated when the frequency gradient decreases at a faster rate than the set value of Start value df dt The df dt detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics Upon detection of df dt operation timer activates the ST_FRG output When the timer has reached the value set by Operate Tm df dt the OPR_FRG output is activated if the df dt condition still persists If d...

Page 459: ...500ms 1s OPERATE is activated as Freq AND df dt condition satisfied OPERATE 48 75 Hz Start of operation timer ST_FRQ OPR_FRQ Start of operation timer 1s Time s Frequency Hz Figure 225 Load shedding operation in the Freq AND df dt mode when both Freq and df dt conditions are satisfied Rated frequency 50 Hz 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 459 ...

Page 460: ... Description Disabled Load restoration is disabled Auto In the Auto mode input frequency is continuously compared to the Restore start Val setting The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics Upon detection of restoring the operation timer activates the ST_REST output When the timer has reached the value of the Restore delay time setting the RESTORE output is activated...

Page 461: ...e timers mode the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE OPR_FRQ and OPR_FRG outputs are not activated 4 5 2 5 Application An AC power system operates at a defined r...

Page 462: ...quired to be deployed at various places near the load centers A quick shedding of a large amount of load from one place can cause a significant disturbance in the system The load shedding scheme can be made most effective if the shedding of load feeders is distributed and discrete that is the loads are shed at various locations and in distinct steps until the system frequency reaches the acceptabl...

Page 463: ...e taken only if necessary In order to take the effect of any transient a sufficient time delay should be set The value of the setting has to be well below the lowest occurring normal frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency of the system The setting level the number of steps and the distance between two steps in time or in frequency depend on the characteristics of the power system...

Page 464: ...es in large power systems the rate of change of the frequency is much less often just a fraction of 1 0 Hz s Similarly the setting for df dt can be from 0 1 Hz s to 1 2 Hz s in steps of 0 1 Hz s to 0 3 Hz s for large distributed power networks with the operating time varying from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second Here the operating time should be kept in minimum for the higher df dt set...

Page 465: ...ck Up signal for under fre quency detection ST_FRG BOOLEAN Pick Up signal for high df dt detection RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restor ing purposes ST_REST BOOLEAN Restore frequency attained and restore timer started 4 5 2 7 Settings LSHDPFRQ Group settings Table 491 LSHDPFRQ Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Load shed mode 1 Freq 6 Freq OR df dt ...

Page 466: ...1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 493 LSHDPFRQ Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 50 Time delay after which the definite timers will reset 4 5 2 8 Monitored data LSHDPFRQ Monitored data Table 494 LSHDPFRQ Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Start duration LSHDPFRQ Enum ...

Page 467: ...phase power directional element DPSRDIR is used to detect positive sequence power direction The output of the function is used for blocking or releasing other functions in protection scheme The directional positive sequence power protection contains a blocking functionality which blocks function output and resets Timer 4 6 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the O...

Page 468: ...gle setting If the angular difference is within the operating sector selected with the Directional mode setting the On signal is sent to Timer The operating sector is defined by the setting Min forward angle Max forward angle Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle The options that can be selected for the Directional mode setting are Forward and Reverse The sector limits are always given as positi...

Page 469: ...racteristic is according to definite time DT When Timer has reached the value of Release delay time the RELEASE output is activated If a drop off situation happens that is if the operating current moves outside the operating sector or signal amplitudes drop below the minimum level before Release delay time is exceeded the Timer reset state is activated If the drop off continues for more than Reset...

Page 470: ... 0 1000 ms 1 10 Release delay time Characteristic an gle 179 180 deg 1 60 Characteristic an gle Max forward angle 0 90 deg 1 88 Maximum phase angle in forward di rection Max reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 88 Maximum phase angle in reverse di rection Min forward angle 0 90 deg 1 88 Minimum phase an gle in forward di rection Min reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 88 Minimum phase an gle in reverse direc tion Direct...

Page 471: ... Monitored data Table 501 DPSRDIR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between operat ing angle and charac teristic angle DPSRDIR Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 7 Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC 4 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device numb...

Page 472: ...module diagram Level detector The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Start value setting The Operation mode setting defines the direction of the level detector Table 502 Operation mode types Operation Mode Description Under If the input signal AI_VALUE is lower than the set value of the Start value setting the level detector enables the timer module Over If the input signal AI_VALUE exceeds t...

Page 473: ...thods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block OPERATE output mode the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated 4 7 5 Application The function block can be used for any general...

Page 474: ...on Start value 10000 0 10000 0 0 1 0 0 Start value Start value Add 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Start value Add Operate delay time 0 200000 ms 100 0 Operate delay time Table 506 MAPGAPC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Operation mode 1 Over 2 Under 1 Over Operation mode Table 507 MAPGAPC Non group settings Advanced Para...

Page 475: ...DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of start time operate time MAPGAPC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 4 7 9 Technical data Table 509 MAPGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 1MRS758755 C Protection functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 475 ...

Page 476: ... the output signal BLK2H is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current I_2H and the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value The operate time characteristic for the function is of definite time DT type The function contains a blocking functionality Blocking deactivates all outputs and resets timers 5 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled a...

Page 477: ...alue the BLK2H output is activated After the timer has elapsed and the inrush situation still exists the BLK2H signal remains active until the I_2H I_1H ratio drops below the value set for the ratio in all phases that is until the inrush situation is over If the drop off situation occurs within the operate time up counting the reset timer is activated If the drop off time exceeds Reset delay time ...

Page 478: ...nt and earth fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the fundamental component exceeds the set value Other applications of this function include the detection of inrush in lines connected to a transformer Figure 235 Inrush current in transformer It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform based inrush blocking from the transformer differential prote...

Page 479: ...ock input status 5 1 6 2 INRPHAR Output signals Table 511 INRPHAR Output signals Name Type Description BLK2H BOOLEAN Second harmonic based block 5 1 7 Settings 5 1 7 1 INRPHAR Group settings Table 512 INRPHAR Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Start value 5 100 1 20 Ratio of the 2 to the 1 harmonic leading to restraint Operate delay time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Oper...

Page 480: ...tatus 5 1 9 Technical data Table 516 INRPHAR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f f n Current measurement 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 I n Ratio I2f I1f measurement 5 0 of the set value Reset time 35 ms 0 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Operate time accuracy 35 ms 0 ms 5 1 10 Technical revision history Table 517 INRPHAR Technical revision history Technical revis...

Page 481: ... detection for both retrip and back up trip The operating values of the current measuring elements can be set within a predefined setting range The function has two independent timers for trip purposes a retrip timer for the repeated tripping of its own breaker and a back up timer for the trip logic operation for upstream breakers A minimum trip pulse length can be set independently for the trip o...

Page 482: ... than the short circuit currents To detect a breaker failure at single phase earth faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual current separately In effectively earthed systems also the setting of the earth fault current protection can be chosen at a relatively low current level The current setting should be chosen in accordance with the setting of the sensitive earth fault pro...

Page 483: ...lure mode setting is set to Both the resetting logic requires that the circuit breaker is in the open condition and the values of the phase currents and the residual current drops below the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function Figure 238 Start logic Timer 1 Once activated the timer runs until the set Retrip time value has el...

Page 484: ...lity to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant Figure 239 Timeline of the breaker failure protection Timer 3 This module is activated by the CB_FAULT signal Once activated the timer runs until the set CB fault delay value has elapsed The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the maximum time value CB fault delay the CB_FAULT_AL ...

Page 485: ... level The TRRET output remains active for a fixed time set with the Trip pulse time setting The activation of the BLOCK input or the CB_FAULT_AL output deactivates the TRRET output POSCLOSE I From Level detector 1 Timer 1 elapsed From Timer 1 OR AND AND CB fail retrip mode Without check CB fail retrip mode Current check CB failure mode Current CB failure mode Breaker status CB failure mode Both A...

Page 486: ...idual current both exceed the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively or two phase currents exceeding the Current value Once TRBU is activated it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value whichever takes longer In most applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient If the CB failure mode is se...

Page 487: ... to trip for the protected component The detection of a failure to break the current through the breaker is made by measuring the current or by detecting the remaining trip signal unconditional CCBRBRF can also retrip This means that a second trip signal is sent to the protected circuit breaker The retrip function is used to increase the operational reliability of the breaker The function can also...

Page 488: ...s a current flow through the circuit breaker The backup trip timer is also initiated at the same time as the retrip timer If CCBRBRF detects a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time which is longer than the retrip time it sends a backup trip signal to the chosen backup breakers The circuit breakers are normally upstream breakers which feed fault current to a faulty feeder T...

Page 489: ...Backup trip TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip 5 2 7 Settings 5 2 7 1 CCBRBRF Non group settings Table 520 CCBRBRF Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Current value 0 05 2 00 xIn 0 01 0 30 Operating phase current Current value Res 0 05 2 00 xIn 0 01 0 30 Operating residual current CB failure trip mode 1 2 out of 4 2 1 out of 3 ...

Page 490: ... 10 200 Pulse length of ret rip and backup trip outputs Start latching mode 1 Rising edge 2 Level sensitive 1 Rising edge Start reset delayed or immediately 5 2 8 Monitored data 5 2 8 1 Table 522 CCBRBRF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CCBRBRF Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 5 2 9 Technical data Table 523 CCBRBRF Technical data Characteristic Value Ope...

Page 491: ...E C37 2 device number Master trip TRPPTRC Master Trip 94 86 5 3 2 Function block Figure 243 Function block 5 3 3 Functionality The master trip function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and handler after the protection functions The features of this function influence the trip signal behavior of the circuit breaker The minimum trip pulse length can be set when the non latched mode is sel...

Page 492: ...tions within the protection relay requiring this signal The BLOCK input blocks the TRIP output and resets the timer Lockout logic TRPPTRC is provided with possibilities to activate a lockout When activated the lockout can be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the RST_LKOUT input or from the LHMI clear menu parameter When using the Latched mode the resetting of the TRIP o...

Page 493: ... the OPERATE input Usually a logic block OR is required to combine the different function outputs to this input The TRIP output is connected to the binary outputs on the IO board This signal can also be used for other purposes within the protection relay for example when starting the breaker failure protection TRPPTRC is used for simple three phase tripping applications OR TRIP CL_LKOUT BLOCK RST_...

Page 494: ...HPTUV2_OPERATE PHPTUV3_OPERATE NSPTOV1_OPERATE PSPTUV1_OPERATE SPCGGIO1_SW_MODE_ENA FEFLPTOC1_OPERATE EFIPTOC1_OPERATE EFHPTOC1_OPERATE FDEFLPDEF1_OPERATE DEFHPDEF1_OPERATE FDEFLPDEF2_OPERATE FRPFRQ2_OPERATE FRPFRQ1_OPERATE Figure 246 Typical TRPPTRC connection with RER615 5 3 6 Signals 5 3 6 1 TRPPTRC Input signals Table 526 TRPPTRC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Fals...

Page 495: ...it Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Trip pulse time 20 60000 ms 1 250 Minimum duration of trip output sig nal Trip output mode 1 Non latched 2 Latched 3 Lockout 1 Non latched Select the opera tion mode for trip output 5 3 8 Monitored data 5 3 8 1 TRPPTRC Monitored data Table 529 TRPPTRC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TRPPTRC Enum 1 on 2 bl...

Page 496: ...LOC 21FL 5 4 2 Function block Figure 247 Function block 5 4 3 Functionality The fault locator function SCEFRFLO provides impedance based fault location It is designed for radially operated distribution systems It is applicable for locating short circuits in all kinds of distribution networks Earth faults can be located in effectively earthed and in low resistance or low reactance earthed networks ...

Page 497: ...age magnitudes must exceed the threshold values of 2 xIn and 3 xUn respectively The function can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of SCEFRFLO can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 248 Functional module diagram 5 4 4 1 Phase selection logic Ident...

Page 498: ...ividual earth faults When the faults are located at the same feeder the corresponding phase to phase loop either AB Fault or BC Fault or CA Fault is used for calculation When the faults are located at different feeders the phase to earth loop either AG Fault or BG Fault or CG Fault corresponding to the faulty phase at the protected feeder is used for calculation 5 4 4 2 Fault impedance and distanc...

Page 499: ...ase of two phase to earth fault In this case the phase to earth loop either AG Fault or BG Fault or CG Fault corresponding to the faulty phase at the protected feeder is used for calculation Figure 249 shows the phase to earth fault loop model The following impedances are measured and stored in the recorded data of SCEFRFLO Flt point resistance Rfault Equation 46 Flt loop resistance R R R N fault ...

Page 500: ...ult loop model In case of radial feeders this algorithm can be applied with low impedance effectively earthed systems where the fault current is fed from one side only The Load modelling algorithm has been especially designed for unearthed systems The Load modelling algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting that is an equivalent load distance as an additional parameter The derivation and ...

Page 501: ...he feeder U d tap d 1 The fictional voltage drop if the entire load would be tapped at the end d 1 of the feeder not drawn in Figure 250 The calculation of this value requires data from the DMS system Alternatively the setting Equivalent load Dis can be determined by conducting a single phase earth fault test R fault 0 Ω at that point of the feeder where the maximum actual voltage drop takes place...

Page 502: ...s ratio is estimated by SCEFRFLO and stored in the recorded data Flt to Lod Cur ratio together with the fault distance estimate In case of unearthed network sufficient fault current magnitude resulting in Flt to Lod Cur ratio 1 can be achieved for example with proper switching operations in the background network if possible which increase the fault current If the faulty feeder is re energized aft...

Page 503: ...en calculated with the fault loop model This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as settings If these settings are not available valid impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model TRUE However valid distance estimate that is the conversion of measured impedance electrical fault distance into a phys...

Page 504: ...lculation is most accurate when the calculation is made with the fault loop model This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as settings If these settings are not available valid impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model TRUE However valid distance estimate that is the conversion of measured imped...

Page 505: ... distance estimation For earth faults the load compensation is done automatically inside the fault distance calculation algorithm For short circuit faults load compensation is enabled with setting Load Com PP loops The default value is Enabled The parameter should be set to Disabled only if the ratio between the expected fault current and load current is large or when the fault distance estimate f...

Page 506: ...tings and these can be set at maximum for three line sections A B and C Each section is enabled by entering a section length which differs from zero to settings Line Len section A Line Len section B or Line Len section C in the order section A section B section C The earth fault loops require both positive sequence and zero sequence impedances for example R1 line section A and X1 line section A R0...

Page 507: ...s X a r km n en 1 4 10 2 0 5 ω ln Ω Equation 59 ω n 2 π f n where f n fundamental frequency Hz a en a a a 12 23 31 3 the geometric average of phase distances m a xy distance m between phases x and y r radius m for single conductor Figure 254 Typical distribution line tower configurations Example values of positive sequence impedances for typical medium voltage overhead lines are given in the follo...

Page 508: ...h positive sequence and zero sequence impedances For short circuit faults zero sequence impedances are not required The positive sequence impedance per unit values for the lines are typically known or can easily be obtained from data sheets The zero sequence values are generally not as easy to obtain as they depend on the actual installation conditions and configurations Sufficient accuracy can ho...

Page 509: ...h leakage Ris setting represents the leakage losses of the protected feeder in terms of resistance per phase The Ph capacitive React setting represents the total phase to earth capacitive reactance of the protected feeder per phase Based on experience a proper estimate for Ph leakage Ris should be about 20 40 Ph capacitive React Figure 255 Equivalent diagram of the protected feeder R L0F Ph leakag...

Page 510: ...on START of ROVPTOV but not seen by the forward looking earth fault protection function START of DEFLPDEF the fault is located outside the protected feeder This is mandatory for valid measurement of setting Ph capacitive React After a set delay TONGAPC the input TRIGG_XC0F is activated and the parameter XC0F Calc in the recorded data is updated The delay TONGAPC must be set longer than the start d...

Page 511: ...s R1 line section A X1 line section A R0 line section A X0 line section A R1 line section B X1 line section B R0 line section B X0 line section B R1 line section C X1 line section C R0 line section C and X0 line section C are used for the fault distance calculation and for conversion from reactance to physical fault distance This option should be used in the case of a non homogeneous line when the...

Page 512: ...o 10 km in 1 km steps marked with circles An error of nearly eight per cent at maximum is created by the conversion procedure when modeling a non homogenous line with only one section By using impedance model with three line sections there is no error in the conversion The previous example assumed a short circuit fault and thus only positive sequence impedance settings were used The results howeve...

Page 513: ...ged by maximum variation in fault distance estimate and defined with setting Distance estimate Va in the same unit as the fault distance estimate When successive estimates during one fundamental cycle are within final value Distance estimate Va the fault distance estimate mean of successive estimates is recorded In case stabilization criterion has not been fulfilled the fault distance estimate is ...

Page 514: ...FLT_DISTANCE is between the settings Low alarm Dis limit and High alarm Dis limit the ALARM output is activated The ALARM output can be utilized for example in regions with waterways or other places where knowledge of certain fault locations is of high importance Figure 260 An example of the ALARM output use Protection related functions 1MRS758755 C 514 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 515: ...e Uo Both alternatives are covered by setting the configuration parameter Phase voltage Meas to Accurate When the Phase voltage Meas setting is set to Ph to ph without Uo and only phase to phase voltages are available but not Uo only short circuit measuring loops fault loops AB Fault BC Fault or CA Fault or ABC Fault can be measured accurately In this case the earth fault loops fault loops either ...

Page 516: ...he feeder is uncertain The triggering of SCEFRFLO can also be inhibited during the autoreclosing sequence This is achieved by connecting the inverted READY signal from the autoreclosing function DARREC which indicates that the autoreclosing sequence is in progress to the BLOCK input of SCEFRFLO Blocking of the SCEFRFLO triggering is suggested during the autoreclosing sequence when the load compens...

Page 517: ...ALARM BOOLEAN Fault location alarm signal 5 4 7 Settings 5 4 7 1 SCEFRFLO Group settings Table 541 SCEFRFLO Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Z Max phase load 1 0 10000 0 ohm 0 1 80 0 Impedance per phase of max load overcurr un der imp PSL Ph leakage Ris 20 1000000 ohm 1 210000 Line PhE leakage resistance in pri mary ohms Ph capacitive React 10 1000000 ohm 1...

Page 518: ... 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 4 000 Zero sequence line resistance line sec tion B X0 line section B 0 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 4 000 Zero sequence line reactance line sec tion B Line Len section B 0 000 1000 000 pu 0 001 0 000 Line length section B R1 line section C 0 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 1 000 Positive sequence line resistance line section C X1 line section C 0 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 1 000 ...

Page 519: ...ce estimate Va 0 001 0 300 0 001 0 015 Allowed variation of short circuit dis tance estimate 5 4 8 Monitored data 5 4 8 1 SCEFRFLO Monitored data Table 545 SCEFRFLO Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description RF FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault point re sistance in pri mary ohms FAULT_LOOP Enum 1 AG Fault 2 BG Fault 3 CG Fault 4 AB Fault 5 BC Fault 6 CA Fault 7 ABC Fault 5 No fault Fault...

Page 520: ...f Status Triggering time Timestamp Estimate trigger ing time Flt loop Enum 1 AG Fault 2 BG Fault 3 CG Fault 4 AB Fault 5 BC Fault 6 CA Fault 7 ABC Fault 5 No fault Fault loop Flt distance FLOAT32 0 00 3000 00 pu Fault distance Flt Dist quality INT32 0 511 Fault distance quality Flt loop resist ance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault loop resist ance Flt loop reac tance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault...

Page 521: ... 00 40 00 xIn Pre fault current phase C magni tude A Pre Flt Phs C Angl FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Pre fault current phase C angle V Pre Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Pre fault voltage phase A magni tude V Pre Flt Phs A Angl FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Pre fault voltage phase A angle V Pre Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Pre fault voltage phase B magni tude V Pre Flt Phs B Angl FLOAT32 ...

Page 522: ...0 00 180 00 deg Fault voltage phase A angle V Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault voltage phase B magni tude V Flt Phs B angle FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Fault voltage phase B angle V Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault voltage phase C magni tude V Flt Phs C angle FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Fault voltage phase C angle 5 4 9 Technical data Table 546 SCEFRFLO Technical data Characteris...

Page 523: ...4 10 Technical revision history Table 547 SCEFRFLO Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement 1MRS758755 C Protection related functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 523 ...

Page 524: ...t is reported to the corresponding function block in the relay configuration The function starts and operates when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure The operating time characteristic for the function is DT The function operates after a predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears The function contains a blocking functionality Blocking deactivates the ALARM output and resets ...

Page 525: ...program The activation of the BLOCK input prevents the ALARM output to be activated 6 1 5 Application TCSSCBR detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker The function can supervise both open and closed coil circuits This supervision is necessary to find out the vitality of the control circuits continuously Figure 263 shows an application of the trip circuit supervision ...

Page 526: ...S is required only in a closed position the external shunt resistance can be omitted When the circuit breaker is in the open position TCS sees the situation as a faulty circuit One way to avoid TCS operation in this situation would be to block the supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open Supervision functions 1MRS758755 C 526 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 527: ...ontacts It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel for example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved The supervising current cannot detect if one or all the other contacts connected in parallel are not connected properly 1MRS758755 C Supervision functions REC615 ...

Page 528: ...l trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCS test current flows through all wires and joints Supervision functions 1MRS758755 C 528 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 529: ... in use does not typically affect the supervising current injection Trip circuit supervision with auxiliary relays Many retrofit projects are carried out partially that is the old electromechanical relays are replaced with new ones but the circuit breaker is not replaced This creates a problem that the coil current of an old type circuit breaker can be too high for the protection relay trip contac...

Page 530: ...hunt resistance 1 kΩ R s trip coil resistance If the external shunt resistance is used it has to be calculated not to interfere with the functionality of the supervision or the trip coil Too high a resistance causes too high a voltage drop jeopardizing the requirement of at least 20 V over the internal circuit while a resistance too low can enable false operations of the trip coil Table 548 Values...

Page 531: ...connected Incorrect connections and use of trip circuit supervision Although the TCS circuit consists of two separate contacts it must be noted that those are designed to be used as series connected to guarantee the breaking capacity given in the technical manual of the protection relay In addition to the weak breaking capacity the internal resistor is not dimensioned to withstand current without ...

Page 532: ... the protection relay R2 is disconnected as shown in the figure while the lower contact is still connected When the protection relay R2 operates the coil current starts to flow through the internal resistor of the protection relay R3 and the resistor burns immediately As proven with the previous examples both trip contacts must operate together Attention should also be paid for correct usage of th...

Page 533: ...nals Table 549 TCSSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block input status 6 1 6 2 TCSSCBR Output signals Table 550 TCSSCBR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output 1MRS758755 C Supervision functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 533 ...

Page 534: ... Step Default Description Reset delay time 20 60000 ms 1 1000 Reset delay time 6 1 8 Monitored data 6 1 8 1 TCSSCBR Monitored data Table 553 TCSSCBR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TCSSCBR Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 1 9 Technical revision history Table 554 TCSSBR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Inter...

Page 535: ...rotection functions SEQSPVC has two algorithms a negative sequence based algorithm and a delta current and delta voltage algorithm A criterion based on the delta current and the delta voltage measurements can be activated to detect three phase fuse failures which usually are more associated with the voltage transformer switching during station operations 6 2 4 Operation principle The function can ...

Page 536: ...ic module Current and voltage delta criterion The delta function can be activated by setting the Change rate enable parameter to True Once the function is activated it operates in parallel with the negative sequence based algorithm The current and voltage are continuously measured in all three phases to calculate Change of voltage dU dt Change of current dI dt The calculated delta quantities are c...

Page 537: ...ystem not caused by the fuse failure is not followed by a current change and a false fuse failure can occur To prevent this the minimum phase current criterion is checked The fuse failure detection is active until the voltages return above the Min Op voltage delta setting If a voltage in a phase is below the Min Op voltage delta setting a new fuse failure detection for that phase is not possible u...

Page 538: ...d to be connected through a protection relay binary input to the N C auxiliary contact of the line disconnector The DISCON_OPEN signal sets the FUSEF_U output signal to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is in the open state It is recommended to always set Enable seal in to True This secures that the blocked protection functions remain blocked until normal voltage condi...

Page 539: ...he negative sequence component based part of the function a fuse failure is detected by comparing the calculated value of the negative sequence component voltage to the negative sequence component current The sequence entities are calculated from the measured current and voltage data for all three phases The purpose of this function is to block voltage dependent functions when a fuse failure is de...

Page 540: ...ttings Table 558 SEQSPVC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Table 559 SEQSPVC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Neg Seq current Lev 0 03 0 20 xIn 0 01 0 03 Operate level of neg seq undercur rent element Neg Seq voltage Lev 0 03 0 20 xUn 0 01 0 10 Operate level of neg...

Page 541: ...onitored data 6 2 8 1 SEQSPVC Monitored data Table 560 SEQSPVC Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description SEQSPVC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 6 2 9 Technical data Table 561 SEQSPVC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time NPS function U Fault 1 1 set Neg Seq volt age Lev 33 ms U Fault 5 0 set Neg Seq volt age Lev 18 ms Delta function ΔU 1 1 set Voltag...

Page 542: ...time exceeds the set limits It utilizes a binary input to indicate the active operation condition The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service on the equipment like motors It indicates the use of the machine and hence the mechanical wear and tear Generally the equipment manufacturers provide a maintenance schedule based on the number of hours of service 6 3 4 Op...

Page 543: ... mode is set to Timed Warn Alm the WARNING and ALARM outputs are activated at the time of day set using Operating time hour The Operating time hour setting is used to set the hour of day in Coordinated Universal Time UTC The setting has to be adjusted according to the local time and local daylight saving time The function contains a blocking functionality Activation of the BLOCK input blocks both ...

Page 544: ...ype Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm accumulated operation time exceeds Alarm value WARNING BOOLEAN Warning accumulated opera tion time exceeds Warning value 6 3 7 Settings 6 3 7 1 MDSOPT Non group settings Table 564 MDSOPT Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Warning value 0 299999 h 1 8000 Warning value for operat...

Page 545: ...ta Table 566 MDSOPT Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MDSOPT Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status OPR_TIME INT32 0 299999 h Total operation time in hours 6 3 9 Technical data Table 567 MDSOPT Technical data Description Value Motor runtime measurement accuracy 1 0 5 6 3 10 Technical revision history Table 568 MDSOPT Technical revision history Technical revisio...

Page 546: ...rvises the voltage presence status The function can be used for indicating voltage presence status of a load break switch or a circuit breaker 6 4 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of PHSVPR can be described by using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained i...

Page 547: ... phase specific output is deactivated and voltage live timer is reset If the measured voltage is lower than setting V dead value and low voltage situation lasts longer than the time set by V dead time setting the voltage presence is interpreted as dead The corresponding phase specific output indicating dead situation is activated Phase status is also reported to the phase selection logic module On...

Page 548: ...ect which one of the MV feeders is energized for feeding the MV LV transformer This can reduce the needed time to restore the power after a fault occurs in the distribution network and power needs to be manually re routed Figure 277 Detect live line to feed MV LV transformer PHSVPR can be used in addition to the other indications to detect if it is safe to start working on the line for example ser...

Page 549: ... to earth voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA_LIVE BOOLEAN Indicate high phase to earth voltage C or phase to phase voltage CA U_DEAD BOOLEAN Indicate low voltage presence U_A_AB_DEAD BOOLEAN Indicate low phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC_DEAD BOOLEAN Indicate low phase to earth voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA_DEAD BOOLEAN Indicate low phase to ea...

Page 550: ...e for high voltage V live time 40 10000 ms 1 100 Duration time for high voltage V dead value 0 1 0 8 xUn 0 1 0 2 Limit value for low voltage V dead time 40 10000 ms 1 100 Duration time for low voltage Table 572 PHSVPR Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Relative hystere sis 1 0 5 0 0 1 4 0 Relative hysteresis for volt age supervision 6 4 8 Monitored dat...

Page 551: ...Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 Un Operation time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 1MRS758755 C Supervision functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 551 ...

Page 552: ...sured input currents as a sum of I yt values Alarms are generated when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs if desired 7 1 4 Operation principle The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and monitoring sub functions The functions can be enabled and disabled...

Page 553: ...ether the breaker is in open closed or invalid position The operation of the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 279 Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status 1MRS758755 C Condition monitoring functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 553 ...

Page 554: ...rcuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction is to indicate if the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 280 Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for circuit breaker operation monitor...

Page 555: ...tact The travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact Figure 282 Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is From Pos to Pos There is a time difference t 1 between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact Similarly there is a time gap t 2 between the time w...

Page 556: ...e is calculated by adding the value set with the Closing time Cor t 4 t 3 setting to the measured closing time The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP and the closing travel time T_TRV_CL are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications Alarm limit check When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set with the Open alarm time settin...

Page 557: ...mit check The OPR_ALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the value set with the Alarm Op number threshold setting However if the number of operations increases further and exceeds the limit value set with the Lockout Op number setting the OPR_LO output is activated The binary outputs OPR_LO and OPR_ALM are deactivated when the BLOCK input is activated 7 1 4 5 Accumu...

Page 558: ...ng to true in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI Alarm limit check The IPOW_ALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value set with the Alm Acc currents Pwr threshold setting However when the energy exceeds the limit value set with the LO Acc currents Pwr threshold setting the IPOW_LO output is activated The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary i...

Page 559: ...or all three phases and it is available as a monitored data value CB_LIFE_A _B _C The values can be cleared by setting the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter Alarm limit check When the remaining life of any phase drops below the Life alarm level threshold setting the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CB_LIFE...

Page 560: ...rm It is possible to block the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary input 7 1 4 8 Gas pressure supervision The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections Figure 289 Functional module diagram for circu...

Page 561: ...ng the closing cycle the first main contact starts closing The auxiliary contact B opens the auxiliary contact A closes and the main contact reaches its closed position The travel times are calculated based on the state changes of the auxiliary contacts and the adding correction factor to consider the time difference of the main contact s and the auxiliary contact s position change Operation count...

Page 562: ... Figure 290 Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV 630 A 16 kA vacuum interrupter Nr the number of closing opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker Ia the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker Calculation of Directional Coef The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula Directional Coef B A I I f r log log 2 2609 Equation 66 I r Rated operating current 630 ...

Page 563: ...indicates that it is time for the circuit breaker maintenance The last value of the spring charging time can be used as a service value Gas pressure supervision The gas pressure supervision monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required value the circuit breaker operations are locked A binary input is available based on the pressure leve...

Page 564: ...0 False Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring 7 1 6 2 SSCBR Output signals Table 576 SSCBR Output signals Name Type Description TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value OPR_ALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations ex ceeds alarm limit OPR_LO BOO...

Page 565: ...g for close travel time in ms Spring charge time 0 60000 ms 10 15000 Setting of alarm for spring charging time of CB in ms Alarm Op number 0 99999 1 200 Alarm limit for number of opera tions Lockout Op num ber 0 99999 1 300 Lock out limit for number of opera tions Current exponent 0 00 2 00 0 01 2 00 Current exponent setting for energy calculation Difference Cor time 10 10 ms 1 5 Corr factor for t...

Page 566: ...open travel time in ms Closing time Cor 100 100 ms 1 10 Correction factor for CB close travel time in ms Counter initial Val 0 99999 1 0 The operation num bers counter initial ization value Ini Acc currents Pwr 0 00 20000 00 0 01 0 00 Initial value for ac cumulation energy Iyt Life alarm level 0 99999 1 500 Alarm level for CB remaining life Pressure alarm time 0 60000 ms 1 10 Time delay for gas pr...

Page 567: ...ife phase B CB_LIFE_C INT32 99999 99999 CB Remaining life phase C IPOW_A FLOAT32 0 000 30000 00 0 Accumulated currents power Iyt phase A IPOW_B FLOAT32 0 000 30000 00 0 Accumulated currents power Iyt phase B IPOW_C FLOAT32 0 000 30000 00 0 Accumulated currents power Iyt phase C SSCBR Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 7 1 9 Technical data Table 580 SSCBR Technical data Characte...

Page 568: ...larm time set ting parameters D The Operation cycle setting parameter re named to Initial CB Rmn life The IPOW_A _B _C range changed E Maximum value of initial circuit breaker re maining life time setting Initial CB Rmn life changed from 9999 to 99999 Added support for measuring circuit breaker travelling time from opening closing command and auxili ary contact state signal change F Alarm Op numbe...

Page 569: ...g active power P reactive power Q apparent power S and power factor PF and for calculating the accumulated energy separately as forward active reversed active forward reactive and reversed reactive PEMMXU calculates these quantities using the fundamental frequency phasors that is the DFT values of the measured phase current and phase voltage signals The information of the measured quantity is avai...

Page 570: ...ated at the end of the next time interval The Logarithmic calculation mode uses the periodic calculation using a log10 function over the demand time interval to replicate thermal demand ammeters The logarithmic demand calculates a snapshot of the analog signal every 1 15 x demand time interval Each measurement function has its own recorded data values In protection relay these are found in Monitor...

Page 571: ...l voltage measurement RESVMMXU 1 of nominal Un Phase sequence current measurement CSMSQI 1 of the nominal In Phase sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 1 of the nominal Un Three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU 1 5 of the nominal Sn When the frequency measurement function FMMXU is unable to measure the network frequency in the undervoltage situation the measured values are set to the nomin...

Page 572: ...hase current measurement CMMXU High limit A high limit Low limit A low limit High high limit A high high limit Low low limit A low low limit Three phase voltage measurement VMMXU High limit V high limit Low limit V low limit High high limit V high high limit Low low limit V low low limit Residual current measurement RE SCMMXU High limit A high limit res Low limit High high limit A Hi high limit re...

Page 573: ...low low Lim Phase sequence voltage measure ment VSMSQI High limit Ps Seq V high limit Ng Seq V high limit Zro V high limit Low limit Ps Seq V low limit Ng Seq V low limit Zro V low limit High high limit Ps Seq V Hi high Lim Ng Seq V Hi high Lim Zro V Hi high Lim Low low limit Ps Seq V low low Lim Ng Seq V low low Lim Three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU High limit Low limit High high li...

Page 574: ...or CMMXU A deadband 2500 2 5 of the total measuring range of 40 I_INST_A I_DB_A 0 30 If I_INST_A changes to 0 40 the reporting delay is t s s 40 0 2500 1000 0 40 0 30 100 10 Table 584 Parameters for deadband calculation Function Settings Maximum minimum range Three phase current meas urement CMMXU A deadband 40 0 40xIn Three phase voltage meas urement VMMXU V Deadband 4 0 4xUn Residual current mea...

Page 575: ...simultaneously when either one of the S or PF values exceeds the preset limit Power and energy calculation The three phase power is calculated from the phase to earth voltages and phase to earth currents The power measurement function is capable of calculating a complex power based on the fundamental frequency component phasors DFT S U I U I U I A A B B C C Equation 69 Once the complex apparent po...

Page 576: ...alculated power values are presented in units of kWh kVArh or in units of MWh MVArh When the energy counter reaches its defined maximum value the counter value is reset and restarted from zero Changing the value of the Energy unit Mult setting resets the accumulated energy values to the initial values that is EA_FWD_ACM to Forward Wh Initial EA_RV_ACM to Reverse Wh Initial ER_FWD_ACM to Forward VA...

Page 577: ...input signal and hence prevent the noise to be shown in the user display The zero clamping is done for the measured analog signals and angle values The demand values are used to neglect sudden changes in the measured analog signals when monitoring long time values for the input signal The demand values are linear average values of the measured signal over a settable demand interval The demand valu...

Page 578: ...ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm 8 1 4 4 Settings CMMXU Non group settings Table 588 CMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Num of phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervi...

Page 579: ...DFT Selects used meas urement mode 8 1 4 5 Monitored data CMMXU Monitored data Table 590 CMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description IL1 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured cur rent amplitude phase A IL2 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured cur rent amplitude phase B IL3 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured cur rent amplitude phase C Max demand IL1 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Maximum de mand f...

Page 580: ...amp Time of mini mum demand phase B Time min de mand IL3 Timestamp Time of mini mum demand phase C BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Block signal for all binary out puts HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High warning LOW_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Low alarm I_INST_A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IL1 Amplitude magnitude o...

Page 581: ...value I_DMD_B FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Demand value of IL2 current I_RANGE_B Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low IL2 Amplitude range I_INST_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IL3 Amplitude magnitude of in stantaneous val ue I_ANGL_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg IL3 current angle I_DB_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IL3 Amplitude magnitude of re ported value I_DMD_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Demand value of IL...

Page 582: ...ded to Moni tored data view Minimum demand value and time added to recorded data Logarith mic demand calculation mode added and de mand interval setting moved under Measure ment menu as general setting to all demand calculations D Internal improvement E Internal improvement 8 1 5 Three phase voltage measurement VMMXU 8 1 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 id...

Page 583: ...ow alarm 8 1 5 4 Settings VMMXU Non group settings Table 595 VMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Num of phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervision V high high limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 40 High alarm voltage limit V high limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 20 H...

Page 584: ...tage amplitude phase AB U23 kV FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Measured phase to phase voltage amplitude phase BC U31 kV FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Measured phase to phase voltage amplitude phase CA BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Block signal for all binary out puts HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High warning LOW_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLE...

Page 585: ...FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U23 Amplitude magnitude of re ported value U_DMD_BC FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Demand value of U23 voltage U_RANGE_BC Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low U23 Amplitude range U_INST_CA FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U31 Amplitude magnitude of in stantaneous val ue U_ANGL_CA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg U31 angle U_DB_CA FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn U31 Amplitude magnitude of re ported va...

Page 586: ...GL_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg UL3 angle U_DMD_C FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Demand value of UL3 voltage 8 1 5 6 Technical data Table 598 VMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured f n 2 Hz At voltages in range 0 01 1 15 U n 0 5 or 0 002 U n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 RMS No suppression 8 1 5 7 Techni...

Page 587: ...e Type Default Description Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all bi nary outputs RESCMMXU Output signals Table 601 RESCMMXU Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning 8 1 6 4 Settings RESCMMXU Non group settings Table 602 RESCMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Op...

Page 588: ...ta RESCMMXU Monitored data Table 604 RESCMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Io A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured residu al current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Block signal for all binary out puts HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High warning I_INST_RES FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Residual current Amplitude mag nitude of instan taneo...

Page 589: ...CMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f f n 0 5 or 0 002 I n at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 I n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 RMS No suppression 8 1 6 7 Technical revision history Table 606 RESCMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C Residual current angle and demand value added to Monitored data v...

Page 590: ... 0 Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all bi nary outputs RESVMMXU Output signals Table 608 RESVMMXU Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning 8 1 7 4 Settings RESVMMXU Non group settings Table 609 RESVMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Of...

Page 591: ...d data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Uo kV FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Measured residu al voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Block signal for all binary out puts HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High warning U_INST_RES FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Residual voltage Amplitude mag nitude of instan taneous value U_ANGL_RES FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Residual ...

Page 592: ... Technical revision history Table 613 RESVMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C Residual voltage angle and demand value added to Monitored data view D Internal improvement E Internal improvement 8 1 8 Frequency measurement FMMXU 8 1 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Frequency measurement F...

Page 593: ...ystem fre quency 8 1 8 5 Settings FMMXU Non group settings Table 615 FMMXU Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On F high high limit 35 00 75 00 Hz 1 60 00 High alarm fre quency limit F high limit 35 00 75 00 Hz 1 55 00 High warning fre quency limit F low limit 35 00 75 00 Hz 1 45 00 Low warning fre quency limit F low...

Page 594: ... 618 FMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 10 mHz in measurement range 35 75 Hz 8 1 8 8 Technical revision history Table 619 FMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added new setting Def frequency Sel Fre quency measurement range lowered from 35 Hz to 10 Hz 8 1 9 Sequence current measurement CSMSQI 8 1 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 id...

Page 595: ...ion Off On Ps Seq A Hi high Lim 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 1 40 High alarm current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A high limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 1 20 High warning cur rent limit for pos itive sequence cur rent Ps Seq A low limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low warning cur rent limit for pos itive sequence cur rent Ps Seq A low low Lim 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low alarm current limit for positive sequence ...

Page 596: ... A Hi high Lim 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 20 High alarm current limit for zero se quence current Zro A High limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 05 High warning cur rent limit for zero sequence current Zro A low limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low warning cur rent limit for zero sequence current Zro A low low Lim 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low alarm current limit for zero se quence current Zro A deadband 100 100000 1 2500 Dea...

Page 597: ...nce current amplitude range I1_INST FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Positive se quence current amplitude in stantaneous val ue I1_ANGL FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Positive se quence current angle I1_DB FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Positive se quence current amplitude re ported value I1_RANGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Positive se quence current amplitude range I0_INST FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Z...

Page 598: ...at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 I n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 8 1 9 7 Technical revision history Table 624 CSMSQI Technical revision history Technical revision Change A B Sequence current angle values added to the Monitored data view C Internal improvement 8 1 10 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 8 1 10 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 ide...

Page 599: ...tage limit for positive sequence voltage Ps Seq V high limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 20 High warning volt age limit for posi tive sequence volt age Ps Seq V low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low warning volt age limit for posi tive sequence volt age Ps Seq V low low Lim 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low alarm voltage limit for positive sequence voltage Ps Seq V deadband 100 100000 1 10000 Deadband configu ration va...

Page 600: ...age limit for zero sequence voltage Zro V low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low warning volt age limit for zero sequence voltage Zro V low low Lim 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low alarm voltage limit for zero se quence voltage Zro V deadband 100 100000 1 10000 Deadband configu ration value for zero sequence volt age for integral cal culation percent age of difference between min and max as 0 001 s 8 1 10 5 M...

Page 601: ... se quence voltage amplitude in stantaneous val ue U1_ANGL FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Positive se quence voltage angle U1_DB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Positive se quence voltage amplitude re ported value U1_RANGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Positive se quence voltage amplitude range U0_INST FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Zero sequence voltage ampli tude instantane ous value U0_ANGL FLOAT32 ...

Page 602: ...requency of the voltage measured f n 2 Hz At voltages in range 0 01 1 15 U n 1 0 or 0 002 U n Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 8 1 11 Three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU 8 1 11 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase power and energy measurement PEMMXU P E P E 8 1 11 2...

Page 603: ...n of the energy related val ues Active power Dir 1 Forward 2 Reverse 1 Forward Direction of active power flow For ward Reverse Reactive power Dir 1 Forward 2 Reverse 1 Forward Direction of reac tive power flow Forward Reverse Table 631 PEMMXU Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Forward Wh Initial 0 999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for for ward active ...

Page 604: ...energy reading S_INST FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power magnitude of in stantaneous val ue S_DB FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power magnitude of re ported value S_DMD FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Demand value of apparent power P_INST FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Active power magnitude of in stantaneous val ue P_DB FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Active power magnitude of re ...

Page 605: ...cumulated for ward active ener gy value ER_FWD_ACM INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated for ward reactive en ergy value Max demand S FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Maximum de mand value of apparent power Min demand S FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Minimum de mand value of apparent power Max demand P FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Maximum de mand value of active power Min demand P FLOAT32 999999 9 99...

Page 606: ...frequency f n 1 Hz 1 5 for apparent power S 1 5 for active power P and active energy 1 1 5 for reactive power Q and reactive energy 2 0 015 for power factor Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n f n where n 2 3 4 5 8 1 11 7 Technical revision history Table 634 PEMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Demand values added to Monitored data Re corded data added to store minim...

Page 607: ...r unit Mult 3 k 6 M 3 k Unit multiplier for presentation of the power related val ues Energy unit Mult 3 k 6 M 3 k Unit multiplier for presentation of the energy related val ues Active power Dir 1 Forward 2 Reverse 1 Forward Direction of active power flow For ward Reverse Reactive power Dir 1 Forward 2 Reverse 1 Forward Direction of reac tive power flow Forward Reverse Table 637 SPEMMXU Non group ...

Page 608: ...otal apparent power phase C PL1 kW 1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Total active power phase A PL2 kW 1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Total active power phase B PL3 kW 1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Total active power phase C QL1 kVAr 1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Total reactive power phase A QL2 kVAr 1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Total reactive power phase B QL3 kVAr 1 FLOAT32 999999 9 99...

Page 609: ...9 9 kW Maximum demand for phase A Max demand PL2 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Maximum demand for phase B Max demand PL3 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Maximum demand for phase C Min demand PL1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Minimum demand for phase A Min demand PL2 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Minimum demand for phase B Min demand PL3 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Minimum demand for phase C Max de...

Page 610: ...e A Time max dmd PL2 Timestamp Time of maximum de mand phase B Time max dmd PL3 Timestamp Time of maximum de mand phase C Time max dmd QL1 Timestamp Time of maximum de mand phase A Time max dmd QL2 Timestamp Time of maximum de mand phase B Time max dmd QL3 Timestamp Time of maximum de mand phase C Time min dmd SL1 Timestamp Time of minimum de mand phase A Time min dmd SL2 Timestamp Time of minimum...

Page 611: ... value phase B S_INST_C FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power mag nitude of instantane ous value phase C S_DB_A FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power mag nitude of reported val ue phase A S_DB_B FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power mag nitude of reported val ue phase B S_DB_C FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power mag nitude of reported val ue phase C S_DMD_A FLOAT3...

Page 612: ...agni tude of reported value phase C P_DMD_A FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Demand value of active power phase A P_DMD_B FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Demand value of active power phase B P_DMD_C FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Demand value of active power phase C Q_INST_A FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive power magni tude of instantaneous value phase A Q_INST_B FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr ...

Page 613: ... instantaneous value phase A PF_INST_B FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Power factor magni tude of instantaneous value phase B PF_INST_C FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Power factor magni tude of instantaneous value phase C PF_DB_A FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Power factor magni tude of reported value phase A PF_DB_B FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Power factor magni tude of reported value phase B PF_DB_C FLOAT32 1 00 1 00 Power factor magni tude of ...

Page 614: ...RV_ACM_C INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value phase C EA_FWD_ACM_A INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active energy value phase A EA_FWD_ACM_B INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active energy value phase B EA_FWD_ACM_C INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active energy value phase C ER_FWD_ACM_A INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated forward reactive en...

Page 615: ...rend of the currents and voltages measured The analog channels can be set to trigger the recording function when the measured value falls below or exceeds the set values The binary signal channels can be set to start a recording either on the rising or the falling edge of the binary signal or on both By default the binary channels are set to record external or internal relay signals for example th...

Page 616: ...gnal triggers the recorder according to the configuration and settings Triggering on the rising edge of a digital input signal means that the recording sequence starts when the input signal is activated Correspondingly triggering on the falling edge means that the recording sequence starts when the active input signal resets It is also possible to trigger from both edges In addition if preferred t...

Page 617: ...ls used the disturbance recorder automatically calculates the remaining amount of recordings that fit into the available recording memory The user can see this information with the Rem amount of rec monitored data The fixed memory size allocated for the recorder can fit in two recordings that are ten seconds long The recordings contain data from all analog and binary channels of the disturbance re...

Page 618: ...E files to the C COMTRADE folder The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 or any appropriate computer software that can access the C COMTRADE folder One complete disturbance recording consists of two COMTRADE file types the configuration file and the data file The file name is the same for both file types The configuration file has CFG and the data file DAT as the file extension Figure 303 Distur...

Page 619: ...m mode the samples are captured according to the Storage rate and Pre trg length parameters In the trend mode one value is recorded for each enabled analog channel once per fundamental cycle The recorded values are RMS values which are scaled to peak level The binary channels of the disturbance recorder are also recorded once per fundamental cycle in the trend mode Only post trigger data is captur...

Page 620: ...he triggering reason is the same as in the previous recording The Exclusion time parameter controls how long the exclusion of triggerings of same type is active after a triggering The exclusion mode only applies to the analog and binary channel triggerings not to periodic and manual triggerings When the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is zero the exclusion mode is disabled and there ar...

Page 621: ...al triggering and periodic triggering are not included in the recording but they create a state change to the Periodic triggering and Manual triggering status parameters which in turn create events The TRIGGERED output can be used to control the indication LEDs of the protection relay The TRIGGERED output is TRUE due to the triggering of the disturbance recorder until all the data for the correspo...

Page 622: ... Operation mode 1 Saturation 2 Overwrite 1 1 Operation mode of the recorder Exclusion time 0 1 000 000 ms 1 0 The time dur ing which triggerings of same type are ignored Storage rate 32 16 8 samples per fundamental cycle 32 Storage rate of the wave form record ing Periodic trig time 0 604 800 s 10 0 Time between periodic trig gerings Stor mode periodic 0 Waveform 1 Trend cy cle 1 0 Storage mode fo...

Page 623: ...B 1 28 SU2B 1 0 0 Disabled Select the sig nal to be re corded by this channel Ap plicable val ues for this parameter are product var iant depend ent Every product var iant includes only the val ues that are applicable to that particu lar variant Table continues on the next page 1 Recordable values are available only in trend mode In waveform mode samples for this signal type are constant zeroes Ho...

Page 624: ...og chan nel Low trigger level 0 00 2 00 pu 0 01 0 00 Low trigger level for the analog chan nel Storage mode 0 Waveform 1 Trend cy cle 1 0 Storage mode for the analog channel Table 643 RDRE Non group binary channel settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 5 off Binary chan nel is enabled or disabled Level trigger mode 1 Positive or Rising 2 Negative or Fa...

Page 625: ...isturbance recording Clear record ings 0 Cancel 1 Trig Clear all re cordings cur rently in memory 8 2 6 Monitored data 8 2 6 1 Monitored data Table 645 RDRE Monitored data Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Number of record ings 0 100 Number of record ings currently in memory Rem amount of rec 0 100 Remaining amount of recordings that fit into the availa ble recording mem ory whe...

Page 626: ...ded Binary channels 33 64 C New channels added to parameter Channel selection Selection names for Trig Recording and Clear Recordings updated D Symbols in the Channel selection setting are updated E New channels IL1C IL2C and IL3C added to Channel selection parameter F Internal improvement G Internal improvement Measurement functions 1MRS758755 C 626 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 627: ... block Figure 304 Function block 9 1 3 Functionality CBXCBR and DCXSWI are intended for circuit breaker and disconnector control and status information purposes These functions execute commands and evaluate block conditions and different time supervision conditions The functions perform an execution command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed If erroneous conditions ...

Page 628: ... is still in a corresponding state Table 647 Status indication Input Status Output POSOPEN POSCLOSE POSITION Monitored data OKPOS OPENPOS CLOSEPOS 1 True 0 False 1 Open 1 True 1 True 0 False 0 False 1 True 2 Closed 1 True 0 False 1 True 1 True 1 True 3 Faulty Bad 11 0 False 0 False 0 False 0 False 0 False 0 Intermedi ate 00 0 False 0 False 0 False Enabling and blocking CBXCBR and DCXSWI have an en...

Page 629: ...and DCXSWI generate an error message When close command is given from communication via LHMI or activating the AU_CLOSE input it is carried out the EXE_CL output only if CLOSE_ENAD is TRUE If the SECRSYN function is used in Command mode the CL_REQ output can be used in CBXCBR Initially the SYNC_OK input is FALSE When the close command given it activates the CL_REQ output which should be routed to ...

Page 630: ...pen command is given AU_OPEN via communication or from LHMI and OPEN_ENAD signal is TRUE In addition the protection trip commands can be routed through the CBXCBR function by using the TRIP input When the TRIP input is TRUE the EXE_OP output is activated immediately and bypassing all enabling or blocking conditions The EXE_CL output is activated when the close command is given AU_CLOSE via communi...

Page 631: ... maximum pulse length is given The Pulse length setting does not affect the length of the trip pulse Control methods The command execution mode can be set with the Control model setting The alternatives for command execution are direct control and secured object control which can be used to secure controlling The secured object control SBO is an important feature of the communication protocols tha...

Page 632: ...ng is needed However in case of simultaneous open and close control the open control is always prioritized 1 Send reservationto other terminals 2 Receive response Selected to operate REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 Figure 309 Control procedure in the SBO method Local Remote operations The local remote selection affects CBXCBR and DCXSWI Local the opening and closing via communication is di...

Page 633: ...ng the IEC 61850 GOOSE messages between feeders Control and interlocking via GOOSEmessages REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 Figure 310 Status indication based interlocking via the GOOSE messaging 9 1 6 Signals 9 1 6 1 CBXCBR Input signals Table 648 CBXCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for open po sition of apparatus from I O 1 POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Si...

Page 634: ...put signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Apparatus open posi tion POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Apparatus closed po sition ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1 True Enables opening ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1 True Enables closing BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks opening BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks closing AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Executes the com mand for open direc tion 1 2 AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False ...

Page 635: ...bled based on the input status CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status 9 1 6 4 DCXSWI Output signals Table 651 DCXSWI Output signals Name Type Description SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed pos...

Page 636: ...s Adaptive pulse 0 False 1 True 1 True Stop in right posi tion Event delay 0 10000 ms 1 200 Event delay of the intermediate posi tion Vendor 0 External equipment vendor Serial number 0 External equipment serial number Model 0 External equipment model 9 1 7 2 DCXSWI Non group settings Table 654 DCXSWI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off...

Page 637: ...ber 0 External equipment serial number Model 0 External equipment model 9 1 8 Monitored data 9 1 8 1 CBXCBR Monitored data Table 656 CBXCBR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0 intermediate 1 open 2 closed 3 faulty Apparatus posi tion indication 9 1 8 2 DCXSWI Monitored data Table 657 DCXSWI Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0 ...

Page 638: ...cal revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and 10 s respectively for Event delay settings Default value changed to 30 s for Operation timeout setting C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 9 2 Disconnector position indicator DCSXSWI and earthing switch indication ESSXSWI 9 2 1 Identification Function descripti...

Page 639: ...ing The binary input filtering time can be adjusted separately for each digital input used by the function block The validity of digital inputs that indicate the object state is used as additional information in indications and event logging Table 660 Status indication Input Status Output POSOPEN POSCLOSE POSITION Monitored data OKPOS OPENPOS CLOSEPOS 1 True 0 False 1 Open 1 True 1 True 0 False 0 ...

Page 640: ... of apparatus from I O 1 9 2 6 2 ESSXSWI Input signals Table 662 ESSXSWI Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for open po sition of apparatus from I O 1 POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for closed po sition of apparatus from I O 1 9 2 6 3 DCSXSWI Output signals Table 663 DCSXSWI Output signals Name Type Description OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position CLOSEP...

Page 641: ...y 0 60000 ms 1 30000 Event delay of the intermediate posi tion Vendor 0 External equipment vendor Serial number 0 External equipment serial number Model 0 External equipment model 9 2 7 2 ESSXSWI Non group settings Table 667 ESSXSWI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Identification ESSXSWI1 switch position Control Object identification Table 668 ESSXSWI N...

Page 642: ...ndication 9 2 9 Technical revision history Table 671 DCSXSWI Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and 30 s respectively for Event delay settings C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 Table 672 ESSXSWI Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s...

Page 643: ...ected The synchrocheck operation mode checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are perfectly synchronized It is used to perform a controlled reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and it is also used to perform a controlled reconnection of the system after reclosing The energizing check function checks that at least one side is dead to ensure that closin...

Page 644: ...rk sections to be controlled by the circuit breaker that is which side has to be live and which side dead are determined by the setting A situation where both sides are dead is possible as well The actual value for defining the dead line or bus is given with the Dead bus value and Dead line value settings Similarly the actual values of live line or bus are defined with the Live bus value and Live ...

Page 645: ...d live setting parameters Synchro check The Synchro check function measures the difference between the line voltage and bus voltage The function permits the closing of the circuit breaker when certain conditions are simultaneously fulfilled The measured line and bus voltages are higher than the set values of Live bus valueand Live line value ENERG_STATE equals to Both Live The measured bus and lin...

Page 646: ... U Line Measured line voltage phase angle f Bus Measured bus frequency f line Measured line frequency T CB Total circuit breaker closing delay including the delay of the protection relay output contacts defined with the Closing time of CB setting parameter value The closing angle is the estimated angle difference after the breaker closing delay The Minimum Syn time setting time can be set if requi...

Page 647: ...r have the same frequency and are in phase with a magnitude that makes the concerned busbars or lines such that they can be regarded as live In the command mode operation an external command signal CL_COMMAND besides the normal closing conditions is needed for delivering the closing signal In the command control mode operation the Synchro check function itself closes the breaker via the SYNC_OK ou...

Page 648: ... command signal is removed too early that is before conditions are fulfilled and the closing pulse is given the alarm timer is reset Maximum Syn time Figure 319 Determination of the checking time for closing The control module receives information about the circuit breaker status and thus is able to adjust the command signal to be delivered to the Synchro check function If the external command sig...

Page 649: ...ed only once for each activated external command signal and a new closing command sequence cannot be started until the external command signal is reset and reactivated The SYNC_INPRO output is active when the closing command sequence is in progress and it is reset when the CL_COMMAND input is reset or Maximum Syn time has elapsed Bypass mode SECRSYN can be set to the bypass mode by setting the par...

Page 650: ...he phasors is counterclockwise The generic rule is that a low voltage side phasor lags the high voltage side phasor by clock number 30º This is called angle difference adjustment and can be set for SECRSYN with the Phase shift setting 9 3 5 Application The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the closi...

Page 651: ...t breaker G SECRSYN DARREC SECRSYN PLC A B U_Bus U_Bus U_Line U_Line Figure 322 Synchrocheck function SECRSYN checking energizing conditions and synchronism Connections A special attention is paid to the connection of the protection relay Furthermore it is checked that the primary side wiring is correct A faulty wiring of the voltage inputs of the protection relay causes a malfunction in the synch...

Page 652: ... is measured Figure 323 Connection of voltages for the protection relay and signals used in synchrocheck 9 3 6 Signals 9 3 6 1 SECRSYN Input signals Table 674 SECRSYN Input signals Name Type Default Description U_BUS SIGNAL 0 Busbar voltage U_LINE SIGNAL 0 Line voltage CL_COMMAND BOOLEAN 0 False External closing re quest BYPASS BOOLEAN 0 False Request to bypass synchronism check and voltage check ...

Page 653: ... dead mode 1 Off 1 Both Dead 2 Live L Dead B 3 Dead L Live B 4 Dead Bus L Any 5 Dead L Bus Any 6 One Live Dead 7 Not Both Live 1 Both Dead Energizing check mode Difference voltage 0 01 0 50 xUn 0 01 0 05 Maximum voltage difference limit Difference frequen cy 0 0002 0 1000 xFn 0 0001 0 0010 Maximum frequen cy difference limit Difference angle 5 90 deg 1 5 Maximum angle difference limit Table 677 SE...

Page 654: ...ontrol mode Close pulse 200 60000 ms 10 200 Breaker closing pulse duration Phase shift 180 180 deg 1 0 Correction of phase difference between measured U_BUS and U_LINE Minimum Syn time 0 60000 ms 10 0 Minimum time to accept synchroniz ing Maximum Syn time 100 6000000 ms 10 2000 Maximum time to accept synchroniz ing Energizing time 100 60000 ms 10 100 Time delay for en ergizing check Closing time o...

Page 655: ... angle dif ference out of limit for synchro nizing FR_DIFF_SYNC BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Frequency differ ence out of limit for synchronizing SECRSYN Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 9 3 9 Technical data Table 680 SECRSYN Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured f n 1 Hz Voltage 3 0 of the set value or 0 01 U n Fr...

Page 656: ...cleared In case of a permanent fault the automatic reclosing is followed by final tripping A permanent fault must be located and cleared before the fault location can be re energized The autoreclosing function DARREC can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for autoreclosing The function provides five programmable autoreclosing shots which can perform one to five successive autoreclosings of ...

Page 657: ...ctivated during the discrimination time the AR function goes to lockout If the INIT_X line defined as the protection signal stays active longer than the time set by the Max trip time setting the AR function goes to lockout long trip The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre defined two minutes alarming earth fault 9 4 3 2 Zone coordination Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence betwee...

Page 658: ...he BLK_THERM signal does not affect the starting of the sequence When the reclose time has elapsed and the BLK_THERM input is active the shot is not ready until the BLK_THERM input deactivates Should the BLK_THERM input remain active longer than the time set by the setting Max Thm block time the AR function goes to lockout If the BLK_THERM input is activated when the auto wait timer is running the...

Page 659: ...f autoreclosing shots is in most applications executed with the INIT_1 6 inputs The DEL_INIT2 4 inputs are not used In some countries starting the protection stage is also used for the shot initiation This is the only time when the DEL_INIT inputs are used 1MRS758755 C Control functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 659 ...

Page 660: ... is capable of delaying a start signal has four time delays The time delay is selected based on the shot pointer in the AR function For the first reclose attempt the first time delay is selected for the second attempt the second time delay and so on For the fourth and fifth attempts the time delays are the same Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_2 signal Str 2 delay shot 1 Str 2 delay shot 2 Str...

Page 661: ...signal of a protection stage After a start delay the AR function opens the circuit breaker and an autoreclosing shot is initiated When the shot is initiated with the trip signal of the protection the protection function trips the circuit breaker and simultaneously initiates the autoreclosing shot If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault that is if SOTF is used the fourth time de...

Page 662: ... elapses Normally all trip and start signals are used to initiate an autoreclosing shot and trip the circuit breaker ACTIVE output indicates reclosing sequence in progress If any of the input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used for blocking the corresponding bit in the Tripping line setting must be FALSE This is to ensure that the circuit breaker does not trip from that signal that is the signal...

Page 663: ...o CBB configuration are First Seventh reclose time Init signals CBB1 CBB7 Blk signals CBB1 CBB7 Shot number CBB1 CBB7 The reclose time defines the open and dead times that is the time between the OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands The Init signals CBBx setting defines the initiation signals The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the CBB rows in the matrix The ...

Page 664: ...es If the INIT_5 line is active during a sequence start the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer the CBB with the smallest individual number is always selected For example if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot that is the shot pointer is 2 CBB2 is started instead of CBB5 Even if the initiation...

Page 665: ...during the synchronism check When the circuit breaker does not close the automatic initiation is carried out if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the reclose command Both the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit breaker does not close The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in the auto initiatio...

Page 666: ...rcuit breaker closes normally and the reclaim time starts When the reclaim time has elapsed the sequence is concluded successful 9 4 4 3 Shot pointer controller The execution of a reclose sequence is controlled by a shot pointer It can be adjusted with the SHOT_PTR monitored data The shot pointer starts from an initial value 1 and determines according to the settings whether or not a certain shot ...

Page 667: ...ated CBB defines the reclose time When the reclose time has elapsed the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the following conditions are fulfilled The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information about the synchronism All AR initiation inputs that are defined protection lines using the Control line setting are inactive The circuit breaker is open The circuit breaker is rea...

Page 668: ...after elapsed discrimination time new shot begins 9 4 4 5 Sequence controller When the LOCKED output is active the AR function is in lockout This means that new sequences cannot be initialized because AR is insensitive to initiation commands It can be released from the lockout state in the following ways The function is reset through communication with the RecRs parameter The same functionality ca...

Page 669: ...ions involving down stream fuses tripping and initiation of shot 1 should be fast instantaneous or short time delayed The tripping and initiation of shots 2 3 and definite tripping time should be delayed In this example two overcurrent elements PHLPTOC and PHIPTOC are used PHIPTOC is given an instantaneous characteristic and PHLPTOC is given a time delay The PROT_CRD output is activated if the SHO...

Page 670: ...CLOSE_CB output is active for the time set with the Close pulse time setting The CLOSE_CB output is deactivated also when the circuit breaker is detected to be closed that is when the CB_POS input changes from open state to closed state The Wait close time setting defines the time after the CLOSE_CB command activation during which the circuit breaker should be closed If the closing of circuit brea...

Page 671: ...it setting defines the number of reclose attempts that are allowed during the time defined with the Frq Op counter time setting If the set value is reached within a pre defined period defined with the Frq Op counter time setting the AR function goes to lockout when a new shot begins provided that the counter is still above the set limit The lockout is released after the recovery time has elapsed T...

Page 672: ...uptions in the power system service and brings the power back on line quickly and effortlessly The basic idea of the autoreclose function is simple In overhead lines where the possibility of self clearing faults is high the autoreclose function tries to restore the power by reclosing the breaker This is a method to get the power system back into normal operation by removing the transient or semi t...

Page 673: ...The settings related to CBB configuration are First Seventh reclose time Init signals CBB1 CBB7 Blk signals CBB1 CBB7 Shot number CBB1 CBB7 The reclose time defines the open and dead times that is the time between the OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB commands The Init signals CBBx setting defines the initiation signals The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the CBB r...

Page 674: ...ed for blocking purposes If the INIT_5 line is active during a sequence start the reclose attempt is blocked and the AR function goes to lockout If more than one CBBs are started with the shot pointer the CBB with the smallest individual number is always selected For example if the INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot that is the shot pointer is 2 CBB2 is started instead of CBB5 ...

Page 675: ...during the synchronism check When the circuit breaker does not close the automatic initiation is carried out if the circuit breaker does not close within the wait close time after issuing the reclose command Both the automatic initiation is allowed when synchronization fails or the circuit breaker does not close The Auto init parameter defines which INIT_X lines are activated in the auto initiatio...

Page 676: ...d flexibility allowing multiple and adaptive sequences Each CBB is identical The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the auto reclose sequence the CBB should be performed that is whether the particular CBB is going to be the first second third fourth or fifth shot During the initiation of a CBB the conditions of initiation and blocking are checked This is done for all CBBs simultane...

Page 677: ... UNSUC _ RECL DEL_INIT_4 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_2 INIT_6 INIT_5 INIT_4 INIT_3 INIT_2 INIT_1 SYNC INC_ SHOTP CB_ READY CB_POS RECL_ON INHIBIT _ RECL BLK_ RCLM_T BLK_ RECL_T BLK_ THERM AR_ON READY Figure 341 Example connection between protection and autoreclosing functions in protection relay configuration It is possible to create several sequences for a configuration Autoreclose sequences for overcurr...

Page 678: ...mes for shot 1 and shot 2 are different but each protection function initiates the same sequence The CBB sequence is described in Table 683 as follows Shot 1 CBB1 0 3s Shot 2 CBB2 15 0s INIT_1 I INIT_2 I INIT_3 Io Lockout Lockout Lockout Figure 343 Two shots with three initiation lines Table 683 Settings for configuration example 1 Setting name Setting value Shot number CBB1 1 Init signals CBB1 7 ...

Page 679: ...s The third shot which is the second shot in the autoreclose sequence initiated by I or Io is set as a delayed autoreclosing and executed after an unsuccessful high speed autoreclosing of a corresponding sequence Figure 344 Autoreclosing sequence with two shots with different shot settings according to initiation signal t HSAR Time delay of high speed autoreclosing here First reclose time t DAR Ti...

Page 680: ...nals CBB2 6 lines 2 and 3 2 4 6 Second reclose time 0 2s an example Shot number CBB3 2 Init signals CBB3 6 lines 2 and 3 2 4 6 Third reclose time 10 0s 9 4 6 4 Delayed initiation lines The auto reclose function consists of six individual auto reclose initiation lines INIT_1 INIT 6 and three delayed initiation lines DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4 DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together with ...

Page 681: ...nd 5 Optionally can also be used with SOTF 9 4 6 5 Shot initiation from protection start signal In it simplest all auto reclose shots are initiated by protection trips As a result all trip times in the sequence are the same This is why using protection trips may not be the optimal solution Using protection start signals instead of protection trips for initiating shots shortens the trip times Examp...

Page 682: ... that after the second shot when the protection starts again Str 2 delay shot 3 elapses before the protection operate time and the final trip follows The total trip time is the protection start delay 0 10 seconds the time it takes to open the circuit breaker 9 4 6 6 Fast trip in Switch on to fault The Str _ delay shot 4 parameter delays can also be used to achieve a fast and accelerated trip with ...

Page 683: ...n blocking signal 2 DEL_INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0 False Delayed AR initializa tion blocking signal 3 DEL_INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0 False Delayed AR initializa tion blocking signal 4 BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks and resets re close time BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks and resets re claim time BLK_THERM BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks and holds the reclose shot from the thermal overload CB_POS BOOLEAN 0 False Circuit b...

Page 684: ...is locked out PROT_CRD BOOLEAN A signal for coordination be tween the AR and the protec tion UNSUC_RECL BOOLEAN Indicates an unsuccessful re closing sequence AR_ON BOOLEAN Autoreclosing allowed READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR is ready for a new sequence i e the CB_READY input equals TRUE ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence is in pro gress 9 4 8 Settings 9 4 8 1 DARREC Non group settings Table 68...

Page 685: ...Fourth reclose time 0 300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB4 Fifth reclose time 0 300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB5 Sixth reclose time 0 300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB6 Seventh reclose time 0 300000 ms 10 5000 Dead time for CBB7 Init signals CBB1 0 63 1 0 Initiation lines for CBB1 Init signals CBB2 0 63 1 0 Initiation lines for CBB2 Init signals CBB3 0 63 1 0 Initiation lines for CBB3 Init s...

Page 686: ...t time for thermal block ing signal deactiva tion Cut out time 0 1800000 ms 100 10000 Cutout time for protection coordi nation Dsr time shot 1 0 10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for first reclosing Dsr time shot 2 0 10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for second reclos ing Dsr time shot 3 0 10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time for third reclosing Dsr time shot 4 0 10000 ms 100 0 Discrimination time...

Page 687: ...0 Delay time for start2 4th reclose Str 3 delay shot 1 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3 1st reclose Str 3 delay shot 2 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3 2nd reclose Str 3 delay shot 3 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3 3rd reclose Str 3 delay shot 4 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start3 4th reclose Str 4 delay shot 1 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start4 1st reclose Str 4 delay sh...

Page 688: ...losing shot in progress shot 1 INPRO_2 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 2 INPRO_3 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 3 INPRO_4 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 4 INPRO_5 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 5 DISCR_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Signal indicating that discrimina tion time is in progress CUTOUT_INPRO BO...

Page 689: ...47483647 Resetable oper ation counter shot 4 CNT_SHOT5 INT32 0 2147483647 Resetable oper ation counter shot 5 COUNTER INT32 0 2147483647 Resetable opera tion counter all shots SHOT_PTR INT32 1 7 Shot pointer val ue MAN_CB_CL BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Indicates CB manual closing during reclosing sequence SOTF BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Switch onto fault DARREC Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 o...

Page 690: ...ation IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Automatic transfer switch ATSABTC ATSABTC ATSABTC 9 5 2 Function block ATSABTC OPEN_CB2 CLOSE_CB1 CLOSE_CB2 INPRO BLKD_AL CB1_POSOPEN CB1_POSCLOSE CB2_POSOPEN CB2_POSCLOSE UN_U_BUS1 UN_U_BUS2 BLOCK OPEN_CB1 Figure 347 Function block 9 5 3 Functionality The automatic transfer switch function ATSABTC acts as a back up in case of interrupti...

Page 691: ...gram are explained in the next sections CLOSE_CB1 CLOSE_CB2 OPEN_CB2 INPRO OPEN_CB1 Control logic Bus fault check CB1_POSOPEN CB1_POSCLOSE CB2_POSOPEN CB2_POSCLOSE UN_U_BUS1 UN_U_BUS2 BLOCK Auto blocking alarm logic BLKD_AL In progress logic Figure 348 Functional module diagram All inputs and outputs for the ATSABTC function block are binary signals Voltage presence indication at each bus is conne...

Page 692: ... blocking conditions In control logic sub module diagrams all the open close situations in automatic mode are illustrated CB1 control logic Figure 350 Sub module diagram for CB1 control logic Operation of the output signals is described in the table Table 693 Operating conditions for output signals of CB1 Output signal Operation description Operation type OPEN_CB1 If bus 1 is faulty and the CB1 po...

Page 693: ... bus 1 If both CB1 and CB2 are open and bus 1 is healthy CLOSE_CB1 is activated af ter Close CB1 delay has ex pired Operation is independ ent of the state on bus 2 Automatic reconnection Setting Main bus priority bus 2 If both CB1 and CB2 are open bus 2 is faulty and bus 1 is healthy CLOSE_CB1 is acti vated after Close CB1 delay has expired Automatic transfer Activation of BLOCK input deactivates ...

Page 694: ...Trip delay has expired Protection Setting Main bus priority bus 1 If CB2 position is closed and bus 1 is healthy OPEN_CB2 is activated after Open CB2 delay has expired Automatic reconnection CLOSE_CB2 Setting Main bus priority bus 2 If both CB1 and CB2 are open and bus 2 is healthy CLOSE_CB2 is activated af ter Close CB2 delay has ex pired Operation is independ ent of the state on bus 1 Automatic ...

Page 695: ...bus or if an auto reconnection is initialized INPRO is reset when an auto transfer or an auto reconnection is completed or if the fault is cleared during the waiting time Auto blocking alarm logic Blocking alarm for auto switching is signalled outside to output BLKD_AL Blocking alarm is TRUE for various reasons BLOCK input is active CB1 is closed and under voltage detected on bus 2 CB2 is closed a...

Page 696: ...s 2 are connected directly to the UN_U_BUS1 and UN_U_BUS2 The undervoltage indication at each bus can be detected from for example functions PHPTUV VMMXU or PHSVPR Load fault detections on busbar such as overcurrent and earth fault functions are connected as grouped protection input to BLOCK Auto mode OFF ON is connected to input BLOCK Control functions 1MRS758755 C 696 REC615 RER615 Technical Man...

Page 697: ...Table 695 ATSABTC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Blocking of function UN_U_BUS1 BOOLEAN 0 False Under voltage on bus 1 UN_U_BUS2 BOOLEAN 0 False Under voltage on bus 2 CB1_POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Circuit breaker open sta tus for bus 1 CB1_POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Circuit breaker close sta tus for bus 1 Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Control functio...

Page 698: ...BOOLEAN Automatic transfer switch blocked alarm 9 5 7 Settings Table 697 ATSABTC Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Main bus priority 1 Bus 1 2 Bus 2 1 Bus 1 Main bus priority 1 or 2 Operate delay CB tr 0 120000 ms 10 200 Circuit breaker trip delay Transfer dead time 0 120000 ms 10 100 Transfer dead time for clos...

Page 699: ... Description 4 test blocked 5 off 9 5 9 Technical data Table 699 ATSABTC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 1MRS758755 C Control functions REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 699 ...

Page 700: ... distortion function CMHAI is used for monitoring the current total demand distortion TDD 10 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of CMHAI can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections BLOCK ALARM Distortion measure ment I...

Page 701: ... are the key characteristics describing power quality Power quality is however a customer driven issue It could be said that any power problem concerning voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of customer equipment is a power quality problem Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices Electronic power converter loads constitute the most important clas...

Page 702: ...rent BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all bi nary outputs 10 1 6 2 CMHAI Output signals Table 701 CMHAI Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for TDD 10 1 7 Settings 10 1 7 1 CMHAI Non group settings Table 702 CMHAI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Demand interval 0 1 minute 1 5 ...

Page 703: ...AT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum de mand TDD for phase B Max demand TDD IL3 FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum de mand TDD for phase C Time max dmd TDD IL1 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand TDD phase A Time max dmd TDD IL2 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand TDD phase B Time max dmd TDD IL3 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand TDD phase C 3SMHTDD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of TDD for phase A DMD_TDD_A ...

Page 704: ...ortion VMHAI PQM3U PQM3V 10 2 2 Function block Figure 357 Function block 10 2 3 Functionality The voltage total harmonic distortion function VMHAI is used for monitoring the voltage total harmonic distortion THD 10 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are On and Off The operation of VMHAI can be described wit...

Page 705: ... phase If any of the calculated demand THD values is above the set alarm limit THD alarm limit the ALARM output is activated The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting It has seven window lengths from 1 minute to 180 minutes The window type can be set with the Demand window setting The available options are Sliding and Non sliding The activation of the BLOCK input blocks...

Page 706: ...ls Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for THD 10 2 7 Settings 10 2 7 1 VMHAI Non group settings Basic Table 707 VMHAI Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation Off On Demand interval 0 1 minute 1 5 minutes 2 10 minutes 3 15 minutes 4 30 minutes 5 60 minutes 6 180 minutes 2 10 minutes Time interval for demand calc...

Page 707: ... max dmd THD UL2 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand THD phase B Time max dmd THD UL3 Timestamp Time of maxi mum demand THD phase C 3SMHTHD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of THD for phase A DMD_THD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand value for THD for phase A 3SMHTHD_B FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of THD for phase B DMD_THD_B FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand value for THD for phase B 3SMHTH...

Page 708: ...e and three phase voltage variation modes Typically short duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the nominal frequency period and less than one minute The maximum magnitude in the case of a voltage swell or depth in the case of a voltage dip or interruption and the duration of the variation can be obtained by measuring the RMS value of the voltage for each phase Internat...

Page 709: ...ard There is no dependence between the phases for variation start The START output and the corresponding phase start are activated when the limit is exceeded or undershot The corresponding phase start deactivation takes place when the limit includes small hysteresis is undershot or exceeded The START output is deactivated when there are no more active phases However when Phase mode is Three Phase ...

Page 710: ... the dip functionality is available the output DIPST is activated when the measured TRMS value drops below the Voltage dip set 3 setting in one phase and also remains above the Voltage Int set setting If the voltage drops below the Voltage Int set setting the output INTST is activated INTST is deactivated when the voltage value rises above the setting Voltage Int set When the same measured TRMS ma...

Page 711: ...h are defined as percentage values calculated from the difference between the reference and the measured voltage For example a dip to 70 percent means that the minimum voltage dip magnitude variation is 70 percent of the reference voltage amplitude The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function and outputs 10 3 4 3 Variation validation The validation criterion for voltage variation is that ...

Page 712: ...e activation of the OPERATE output and recording data update takes place These counters are available through the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications There are no phase segregated counters but all the variation detections are registered to a common time magnitude classified counter type Consequently a simultaneous multiphase event that is the variation type event de...

Page 713: ...re rising back above Voltage dip set 3 The event indication ends and possible detection is done when the TRMS voltage returns above for dip and interruption or below for swell the activation starting limit For example after an instantaneous dip the event indication when the voltage magnitude exceeds Voltage dip set 1 is not detected and recorded immediately but only if no longer dip indication for...

Page 714: ...y built in function that checks the relationship adherence so that if VVa x time 1 is set higher than VVa x time 2 or VVa x time 3 VVa x time 2 and VVa x time 3 are set equal to the new VVa x time 1 If VVa x time 2 is set higher than VVa x time 3 VVa x time 3 is set to the new VVa x time 2 If VVa x time 2 is set lower than VVa x time 1 the entered VVa x time 2 is rejected If VVa x time 3 is set lo...

Page 715: ...s no longer fulfilled variation is indicated as a dip as long as all phases are active In case of a single phase interruption of Figure 365 when there is a dip indicated in another phase but the third phase is not active there is no variation indication start when Phase Mode is Three Phase In this case only the Phase Mode value Single Phase results in the ST_B interruption and the ST_A dip It is a...

Page 716: ... the phases are active Furthermore both swell and dip variation event detections take place simultaneously In case of a concurrent voltage dip and voltage swell both SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are incremented by one Also Figure 367 shows that for the Phase Mode value Three Phase two different time moment variation event swell detections take place and consequently DIPCNT is incremented by one but SWELLCN...

Page 717: ... swell 10 3 5 Recorded data Besides counter increments the information required for a later fault analysis is stored after a valid voltage variation is detected Recorded data information When voltage variation starts the phase current magnitudes preceding the activation moment are stored Also the initial voltage magnitudes are temporarily stored at the variation starting moment If the variation is...

Page 718: ...e older data sets are moved to the next banks 1 2 and 2 3 when a valid voltage variation is detected When all three banks have data and a new variation is detected the newest data are placed into bank 1 and the data in bank 3 are overwritten by the data from bank 2 Figure 368 shows a valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips for the Phase mode value Single Phase The first dip event duration...

Page 719: ...ation duration Ph B Variation Dur Ph B Variation Ph B start time stamp phase B var iation start time moment Var Dur Ph B time Variation duration Ph C Variation Dur Ph C Variation Ph C start time stamp phase C var iation start time moment Var Dur Ph C time Current magnitude Ph A preceding variation Var current Ph A Current magnitude Ph B preceding variation Var current Ph B Current magnitude Ph C p...

Page 720: ...uipment Voltage dips are typically caused by faults occurring in the power distribution system Typical reasons for the faults are lightning strikes and tree contacts In addition to fault situations the switching of heavy loads and starting of large motors also cause dips Voltage swells cause extra stress for the network components and the devices connected to the power system Voltage swells are ty...

Page 721: ...e measurement mode is always TRMS 10 3 7 Signals 10 3 7 1 PHQVVR Input signals Table 712 PHQVVR Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current mag nitude I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current mag nitude I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current mag nitude U_A SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age A U_B SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age B U_C SIGNAL 0 Phase to earth volt age C BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False B...

Page 722: ...00 0 140 0 0 1 120 0 Swell limit 2 in of reference voltage VVa swell time 2 10 0 80 0 cycles 0 1 10 0 Voltage variation swell duration 2 Voltage swell set 3 100 0 140 0 0 1 120 0 Swell limit 3 in of reference voltage VVa swell time 3 2000 60000 ms 10 2000 Voltage variation swell duration 3 Voltage Int set 0 0 100 0 0 1 10 0 Interruption limit in of reference volt age VVa Int time 1 0 5 30 0 cycles...

Page 723: ...ltage Varia tion Event in pro gress ST_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Start Phase B Voltage Varia tion Event in pro gress ST_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Start Phase C Voltage Varia tion Event in pro gress INSTSWELLCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Instantaneous swell operation counter MOMSWELLCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Momentary swell operation coun ter TEMPSWELLCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Temporary swell operation coun ter M...

Page 724: ... 0 2147483647 Sustained inter ruption opera tion counter MAXDURINTCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Maximum dura tion interruption operation coun ter PHQVVR Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status Time Timestamp Time Variation type Enum 0 No variation 1 Swell 2 Dip 3 Swell dip 4 Interruption 5 Swell Int 6 Dip Int 7 Swell dip Int Variation type Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Variation mag...

Page 725: ...Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time stamp Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation dura tion Phase C Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time stamp Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magni tude Phase A preceding varia tion Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magni tude Phase B preceding varia tion Var current Ph C FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 ...

Page 726: ... start time stamp Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation dura tion Phase B Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time stamp Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation dura tion Phase C Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time stamp Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magni tude Phase A preceding varia tion Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0 00 ...

Page 727: ...T32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation dura tion Phase A Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time stamp Variation Dur Ph B FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation dura tion Phase B Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time stamp Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation dura tion Phase C Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time stamp Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0 ...

Page 728: ...viding a high quality that is a balanced voltage supply on a continuous basis VSQVUB uses five different methods for calculating voltage unbalance The methods are the negative sequence voltage magnitude zero sequence voltage magnitude ratio of the negative sequence voltage magnitude to the positive sequence voltage magnitude ratio of the zero sequence voltage magnitude to the positive sequence vol...

Page 729: ...riod The Average calculation module uses five different methods for the average calculation The required method can be selected with the Unb detection method parameter When the Neg Seq mode is selected with Unb detection method the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the negative sequence voltage magnitude Similarly when the Zero Seq mode is selected the voltage unbalance is calculated based ...

Page 730: ...lator PCT_UNB_AL OBS_PR_ACT BLOCK 10MIN_MN_UNB from Average calculator 3s_MN_UNB from Average calculator Figure 372 Percentile calculation Observation period The Observation period module calculates the length of the observation time for the Statistics recorder sub module as well as determines the possible start of a new one A new period can be started by timed activation using calendar time setti...

Page 731: ...he length of the period is determined by the settings Obs period selection and User Def Obs period The OBS_PR_ACT output is an indication signal which exhibits rising edge TRUE when the observation period starts and falling edge FALSE when the observation period ends If the Percentile unbalance Trigger mode or Obs period duration settings change when OBS_PR_ACT is active OBS_PR_ACT deactivates imm...

Page 732: ...odule If the trigger mode is selected Periodic or Continuous and the blocking is deactivated before the next observation period is due to start the scheduled period starts normally Statistics recorder The Statistics recorder module provides readily calculated three second or ten minute values of the selected phase to the percentile calculator module based on the length of the active observation pe...

Page 733: ...the output PCT_UNB_VAL Recorded data The information required for a later fault analysis is stored when the Recorded data module is triggered This happens when a voltage unbalance is detected by the Voltage unbalance detector module Three sets of recorded data are available in total The sets are saved in data banks 1 3 The data bank 1 holds the most recent recorded data Older data are moved to the...

Page 734: ...he network and load unbalance that may cause sustained voltage unbalance A single phase or phase to phase fault in the network or load side can create voltage unbalance but as faults are usually isolated in a short period of time the voltage unbalance is not a sustained one Therefore the voltage unbalance may not be covered by VSQVUB Another major application is the long term power quality monitor...

Page 735: ... volt age unbalance exceeds the limit PCT_UNB_AL BOOLEAN Alarm active when percentile unbalance exceeds the limit OBS_PR_ACT BOOLEAN Observation period is active 10 4 7 Settings 10 4 7 1 VSQVUB Non group settings Table 723 VSQVUB Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation On Off Unb detection method 1 Neg Seq 2 Zero Seq 3 Neg t...

Page 736: ...iod start year in YYYY Obs period Str month 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 December 1 January Calendar time for observation period start month Obs period Str day 1 31 1 Calendar time for observation period start day Obs period Str hour 0 23 h 0 Calendar time for observation period start hour 10 4 8 Monitored data 10 4 8 1 VSQ...

Page 737: ...ervation peri od Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Maximum 3 sec onds unbalance voltage Time Max Unb Volt Timestamp Time stamp of maximum volt age unbalance Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Maximum 3 sec onds un...

Page 738: ...mp Time stamp of maximum volt age unbalance VSQVUB Enum 1 on 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 off Status 10 4 9 Technical data Table 725 VSQVUB Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 Un Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Power quality measurement functions 1MRS758755 C 738 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 739: ...termined solely with the Reset delay time setting The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults for example self sealing insulation faults and severe faults which may produce high asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers It is typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop off periods during...

Page 740: ...ff In case 1 the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2 the counter is reset immediately because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero General function block features 1MRS758755 C 740 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 741: ...current is below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region The timer input rises when a fault current is detected The definite timer activates the START output and the operate timer starts elapsing The reset drop off timer starts when the timer input falls that is the fault disappears When the reset drop off timer elapses the operate timer is reset Since this happens before another start o...

Page 742: ...s below the set Start value and the set hysteresis region The timer input rises when a fault current is detected The definite timer activates the START output and the operate timer starts elapsing The Reset drop off timer starts when the timer input falls that is the fault disappears Another fault situation occurs before the reset drop off timer has elapsed This causes the activation of the OPERAT...

Page 743: ...uring the time BLOCK remains active If the timer input is not active longer than specified by the Reset delay time setting the operate timer is reset in the same way as described in Figure 375 regardless of the BLOCK input The selected blocking mode is Freeze timer 11 2 Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical ...

Page 744: ...rve type and the setting values used The curve scaling is determined with the Time multiplier setting There are two methods to level out the inverse time characteristic The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operating time for the IDMT curve that is the operation time is always at least the Minimum operate time setting Alternatively the IDMT Sat point is used for giving the leveling ...

Page 745: ...ased on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with the Minimum operate time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 745 ...

Page 746: ...time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with IDMT Sat point setting value 11 the Minimum operate time setting is set to minimum General function block features 1MRS758755 C 746 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 747: ... is outside the guaranteed measuring range Also the maximum measured current of 50 x In gives the leveling out point 50 2 5 20 x I I 11 2 1 1 Standard inverse time characteristics For inverse time operation both IEC and ANSI IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported The operate times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A B and C The values of the c...

Page 748: ...erse 0 0086 0 0185 0 02 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 6 Long Time Ex tremely Inverse 64 07 0 250 2 0 7 Long Time Very In verse 28 55 0 712 2 0 8 Long Time Inverse 0 086 0 185 0 02 9 IEC Normal Inverse 0 14 0 0 0 02 10 IEC Very Inverse 13 5 0 0 1 0 11 IEC Inverse 0 14 0 0 0 02 12 IEC Extremely In verse 80 0 0 0 2 0 13 IEC Short Time Inverse 0 05 0 0 0 04 14 IEC Long Time In verse 120...

Page 749: ...Figure 381 ANSI extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 749 ...

Page 750: ...Figure 382 ANSI very inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 750 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 751: ...Figure 383 ANSI normal inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 751 ...

Page 752: ...Figure 384 ANSI moderately inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 752 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 753: ...Figure 385 ANSI long time extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 753 ...

Page 754: ...Figure 386 ANSI long time very inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 754 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 755: ...Figure 387 ANSI long time inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 755 ...

Page 756: ...Figure 388 IEC normal inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 756 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 757: ...Figure 389 IEC very inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 757 ...

Page 758: ...Figure 390 IEC inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 758 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 759: ...Figure 391 IEC extremely inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 759 ...

Page 760: ...Figure 392 IEC short time inverse time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 760 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 761: ... characteristics 11 2 1 2 User programmable inverse time characteristics The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard formula 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 761 ...

Page 762: ...aracteristics The RI type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays The RD type is an earth fault specific characteristic The RI type is calculated using the formula t s k I I 0 339 0 236 Equation 79 The RD type is calculated using the formula t s I k I 5 8 1 35 In Equation 80 t s Operate time in seconds k set Time multiplier I Measured current I set Start value General function block fea...

Page 763: ...Figure 394 RI type inverse time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 763 ...

Page 764: ...e time operation standard recloser inverse time characteristics are supported The trip times for the curves are defined with the coefficients A B and C The values of the coefficients can be calculated according to the formula General function block features 1MRS758755 C 764 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 765: ...point data Recloser 7 152 Point to point data Recloser 8 113 1 68546 0 158114 1 78873 0 436523 Recloser 8 111 1 42732 0 003704 1 70112 0 366699 Recloser 8 1 42302 0 007846 1 42529 0 442626 Recloser 9 131 2 75978 5 10647 1 0353 0 614258 Recloser 11 141 21 6149 10 6768 2 69489 0 67185 Recloser 13 142 Point to point data Recloser 14 119 Point to point data Recloser 15 112 Point to point data Recloser...

Page 766: ...r K Ground 165 Point to point data Recloser K Phase 162 11 9847 0 000324 2 01174 0 688477 Recloser L 107 Point to point data Recloser M 118 Point to point data Recloser N 104 0 285625 0 71079 0 911551 0 464202 Recloser P 115 Point to point data Recloser P 115 Point to point data Recloser R 105 0 001015 0 13381 0 00227 0 998848 Recloser T 161 Point to point data Recloser V 137 Point to point data R...

Page 767: ... 1 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value Figure 396 Recloser curve 1 102 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 767 ...

Page 768: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 397 Recloser curve 2 135 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 768 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 769: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 398 Recloser curve 3 140 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 769 ...

Page 770: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 399 Recloser curve 4 106 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 770 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 771: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 400 Recloser curve 5 114 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 771 ...

Page 772: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 401 Recloser curve 6 136 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 772 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 773: ... 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 402 Recloser curve 7 152 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 773 ...

Page 774: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 403 Recloser curve 8 113 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 774 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 775: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 404 Recloser curve 8 111 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 775 ...

Page 776: ... 1 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 405 Recloser curve 8 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 776 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 777: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 406 Recloser curve 9 131 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 777 ...

Page 778: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 407 Recloser curve 11 141 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 778 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 779: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 408 Recloser curve 13 142 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 779 ...

Page 780: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 409 Recloser curve 14 119 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 780 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 781: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 410 Recloser curve 15 112 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 781 ...

Page 782: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 411 Recloser curve 16 139 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 782 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 783: ...1 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value Figure 412 Recloser curve 17 103 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 783 ...

Page 784: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 413 Recloser curve 18 151 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 784 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 785: ... 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value Figure 414 Recloser curve A 101 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 785 ...

Page 786: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 415 Recloser curve B 117 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 786 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 787: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 416 Recloser curve C 133 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 787 ...

Page 788: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 417 Recloser curve D 116 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 788 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 789: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 418 Recloser curve E 132 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 789 ...

Page 790: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 419 Recloser curve F 163 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 790 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 791: ... 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 1 6 k Figure 420 Recloser curve G 121 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 791 ...

Page 792: ... 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 7 Figure 421 Recloser curve H 122 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 792 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 793: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 422 Recloser curve J 164 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 793 ...

Page 794: ...1 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 423 Recloser curve K ground 165 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 794 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 795: ...01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 424 Recloser curve K phase 162 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 795 ...

Page 796: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 425 Recloser curve L 107 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 796 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 797: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 426 Recloser curve M 118 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 797 ...

Page 798: ... 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 4 0 2 0 1 6 1 3 k 1 0 0 7 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 Figure 427 Recloser curve N 104 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 798 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 799: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 428 Recloser curve P 115 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 799 ...

Page 800: ...0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 429 Recloser curve R 105 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 800 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 801: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 430 Recloser curve T 161 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 801 ...

Page 802: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 431 Recloser curve V 137 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 802 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 803: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 432 Recloser curve W 138 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 803 ...

Page 804: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 433 Recloser curve Y 120 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 804 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 805: ... 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Time s Current multiples of start value 0 1 Figure 434 Recloser curve Z 134 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 805 ...

Page 806: ...ing hysteresis The integral sum of the inverse time counter is reset if another start does not occur during the reset delay If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as Def time reset the current level has no influence on the reset characteristic Inverse reset Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user programmable curves If you use other curve types immediate reset occurs Stan...

Page 807: ...es Curve name D 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse 29 1 2 ANSI Very Inverse 21 6 3 ANSI Normal Inverse 0 46 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse 4 85 6 Long Time Extremely Inverse 30 7 Long Time Very Inverse 13 46 8 Long Time Inverse 4 6 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 807 ...

Page 808: ...Figure 435 ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 808 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 809: ...Figure 436 ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 809 ...

Page 810: ...Figure 437 ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 810 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 811: ...Figure 438 ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 811 ...

Page 812: ...Figure 439 ANSI long time extremely inverse reset time characteristics General function block features 1MRS758755 C 812 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 813: ...Figure 440 ANSI long time very inverse reset time characteristics 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 813 ...

Page 814: ...s not available for IEC type inverse time curves User programmable delayed inverse reset The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the following formula using the set Curve parameter D General function block features 1MRS758755 C 814 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 815: ...e applied The selected blocking mode is Freeze timer The activation of the BLOCK input also lengthens the minimum delay value of the timer Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the START output It still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Start value and inactive when the current falls below the set Start value and the set Reset delay time has expired 11 3 V...

Page 816: ...ues used The user determines the curve scaling with the Time multiplier setting The Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum operate time for the IDMT mode that is it is possible to limit the IDMT based operate time for not becoming too short For example Figure 442 Operate time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum operate time set to 0 5 second General function block features 1M...

Page 817: ...time characteristics for overvoltage protection The operate times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A B C D and E The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula t s k A B U U U C D E Equation 84 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 817 ...

Page 818: ... of Time multiplier Table 730 Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves Curve name A B C D E 17 Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1 18 Inverse Curve B 480 32 0 5 0 035 2 19 Inverse Curve C 480 32 0 5 0 035 3 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 818 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 819: ...Figure 444 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 819 ...

Page 820: ...Figure 445 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection General function block features 1MRS758755 C 820 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 821: ...protection 11 3 1 2 User programmable inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 821 ...

Page 822: ... set for it The Curve Sat Relative setting for curves A B and C is 2 0 percent However it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning the discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is used Thus the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively...

Page 823: ...curves are defined with the coefficients A B C D and E The inverse operate time can be calculated with the formula t s k A B U U U C D E Equation 86 t s operate time in seconds U measured voltage U the set value of the Start value setting k the set value of the Time multiplier setting Table 731 Curve coefficients for standard undervoltage IDMT curves Curve name A B C D E 21 Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0...

Page 824: ...Figure 447 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection General function block features 1MRS758755 C 824 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 825: ...tage protection 11 3 2 2 User programmable inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula 1MRS758755 C General function block features REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 825 ...

Page 826: ...ting for curves A B and C is 2 0 percent However it should be noted that the user must carefully calculate the curve characteristics concerning also discontinuities in the curve when the programmable curve equation is used Thus the Curve Sat Relative parameter gives another degree of freedom to move the inverse curve on the voltage ratio axis and it effectively sets the maximum operate time for th...

Page 827: ...umerically calculated fundamental component of the signal Peak to peak Peak to peak with peak backup Consequently the measurement mode can be selected according to the application In extreme cases for example with high overcurrent or harmonic content the measurement modes function in a slightly different way The operation accuracy is defined with the frequency range of f fn 0 95 1 05 In peak to pe...

Page 828: ...nti aliasing filter of the protection relay inputs Consequently this mode is usually used in conjunction with high and instantaneous stages where the suppression of harmonics is not so important In addition the peak to peak mode allows considerable CT saturation without impairing the performance of the operation Peak to peak with peak backup The peak to peak with peak backup measurement principle ...

Page 829: ... U a U A B C 1 2 3 Equation 95 U U a U a U A B C 2 2 3 Equation 96 When VT connection is selected as Delta the positive and negative phase sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase to phase voltages according to the equations U U a U AB BC 1 2 3 Equation 97 U U a U AB BC 2 3 Equation 98 The phase to earth voltages are calculated from the phase to phase voltages when VT connection i...

Page 830: ...phase to phase voltages are calculated from the phase to earth voltages when VT connection is selected as Wye according to the equations U U U AB A B Equation 102 U U U BC B C Equation 103 U U U CA C A Equation 104 General function block features 1MRS758755 C 830 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 831: ...d accuracy limit primary current to the rated primary current For example a protective current transformer of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10 For protective current transformers the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed for the accuracy class concerned followed by ...

Page 832: ...ing input of the protection relay is not exceeded This is always fulfilled when I1n Ikmax 100 Ikmax is the highest fault current The saturation of the CT protects the measuring circuit and the current input of the protection relay For that reason in practice even a few times smaller nominal primary current can be used than given by the formula Recommended start current settings If Ikmin is the low...

Page 833: ...cy limit factor Fa should be chosen using the formula Fa 20 Current start value I1n The Current start value is the primary start current setting of the protection relay 12 1 1 3 Example for non directional overcurrent protection The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder The protection is implemented as three stage definite time non directional overcurrent protection Figure 449...

Page 834: ...tiple with nominal primary current of the CT For the CT characteristics point of view the criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay setting is considerably below the Fa In this application the CT rated burden could have been selected much lower than 10 VA for economical reasons Requirements for measurement transformers 1MRS758755 C 834 R...

Page 835: ...ay s physical connections 13 1 Module slot numbering 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 450 Module slot numbering 1 X000 2 X100 3 X110 4 X120 5 X130 1MRS758755 C Protection relay s physical connections REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 835 ...

Page 836: ...ons All binary and analog connections are described in the product specific application engineering guides 13 4 Communication connections The front communication connection is an RJ 45 type connector used mainly for configuration and setting Galvanic RJ 45 Ethernet connection Optical LC Ethernet connection ST type glass fiber serial connection EIA 485 serial connection EIA 232 serial connection Ne...

Page 837: ...munication module is provided with either galvanic RJ 45 connection or optical multimode LC type connection depending on the product variant and the selected communication interface option A shielded twisted pair cable CAT 5e is used with the RJ 45 connector and an optical multi mode cable 2 km with the LC type connector In addition communication modules with multiple Ethernet connectors enable th...

Page 838: ...13 4 5 Optical ST serial rear connection Serial communication can be used optionally through an optical connection either in loop or star topology The connection idle state is light on or light off Using ST loop mode requires an ST serial converter that supports detecting and removing of duplicate request after transmission trough full circle 13 4 6 Communication interfaces and protocols The commu...

Page 839: ...RJ 45 COM0032 2xLC RJ 45 ST ARC COM0023 RJ 45 RS232 485 RS485 ST IRIG B COM0037 2xLC RJ 45 Figure 452 Communication module options Table 734 Station bus communication interfaces included in communication mod ules Module ID RJ 45 LC EIA 485 EIA 232 EIA 485 ST COM0001 1 COM0002 1 COM0022 1 1 COM0023 1 1 1 1 Table continues on the next page 1MRS758755 C Protection relay s physical connections REC615 ...

Page 840: ... Table 736 LED descriptions for COM0022 and COM0023 LED Connector Description 3 FX X12 Not used by COM0023 X1 X1 LAN Link status and activity RJ 45 and LC FL X12 Not used by COM0023 RX X6 COM1 2 wire 4 wire receive activity TX X6 COM1 2 wire 4 wire transmit activi ty RX X5 X12 COM2 2 wire 4 wire or fiber optic receive activity TX X5 X12 COM2 2 wire 4 wire or fiber optic transmit activity I B X5 IR...

Page 841: ...he communication port for COM0022 COM1 connector X6 EIA 232 EIA 485 2 wire EIA 485 4 wire The optional communication module COM0023 supports EIA 232 EIA 485 serial communication X6 connector EIA 485 serial communication X5 connector and optical ST serial communication X12 connector Two independent communication ports are supported by COM0023 The two 2 wire ports use COM1 and COM2 Alternatively if ...

Page 842: ...0 1 2 3 3 2 1 X27 X 28 3 2 1 GUID D4044F6B 2DA8 4C14 A491 4772BA108292 V1 EN Figure 453 Jumper connections on communication module COM0022 revisions A F Protection relay s physical connections 1MRS758755 C 842 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 843: ...Figure 454 Jumper connections on communication module COM0022 revision G or later 1MRS758755 C Protection relay s physical connections REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 843 ...

Page 844: ...3 1 2 3 X 17 X 18 X 16 X15 X14 X13 1 2 3 X24 1 2 3 X3 X25 1 2 3 5 4 3 2 1 X 27 X 28 3 2 1 Figure 455 Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revisions A F Protection relay s physical connections 1MRS758755 C 844 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 845: ...n be either EIA 232 or EIA 485 The type is selected by setting jumpers X19 X20 X21 and X26 The jumpers are set to EIA 232 by default Table 740 EIA 232 and EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description X19 1 2 2 3 EIA 485 EIA 232 X20 1 2 2 3 EIA 485 EIA 232 X21 1 2 2 3 EIA 485 EIA 232 X26 1 2 EIA 485 1MRS758755 C Protection relay s physical connections REC615 RER615 Technic...

Page 846: ...nector X6 2 wire connection X6 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled 1 X7 1 2 2 3 Bus termination enabled Bus termination disabled 1 Table 742 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X5 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled 1 COM1 Rear connector X6 4 wire TX channel X6 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled 1 X7 1 2 2 3 Bus termination enabled Bus term...

Page 847: ...ation enabled Bus termination disabled Table 745 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X13 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled COM2 4 wire TX channel X14 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled X15 1 2 2 3 Bus termination enabled Bus termination disabled X17 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled 4 wire RX channel X18 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias di...

Page 848: ...0022 and COM0023 X6 Pin EIA 232 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 DTR 5 AGND 6 7 RTS 8 CTS Table 748 EIA 485 connections for COM0022 and COM0023 X6 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 1 Rx 6 Rx 7 B Tx 8 A Tx Table 749 EIA 485 connections for COM0023 X5 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 9 Rx 8 Rx 7 A Tx 6 B Tx Table continues on the next page Protection relay s physical connections 1MRS758755 C 848 REC615 RER615 Technical Man...

Page 849: ...ections The optional communication modules include support for optical ST serial communication X9 connector The fibre optic ST connection uses the COM1 port X15 X24 3 2 1 3 2 1 Figure 457 Jumper connections on communication module COM0032 1MRS758755 C Protection relay s physical connections REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 849 ...

Page 850: ...er connectors Group Jumper connection Description X15 1 2 2 3 Star topology Loop topology X24 1 2 2 3 Idle state Light on Idle state Light off Protection relay s physical connections 1MRS758755 C 850 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 851: ...of U n 12 72 V DC 80 120 of U n 38 4 300 V DC Start up threshold 19 2 V DC 24 V DC 80 Burden of auxiliary voltage supply under quiescent P q operating condition DC 13 0 W nominal 18 0 W max AC 16 0 W nominal 21 0 W max DC 13 0 W nominal 18 0 W max Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Max 15 of the DC value at frequency of 100 Hz Fuse type T4A 250 V The protection relay does not include any batteries...

Page 852: ...zing inputs of SIM0001 Table 754 Energizing inputs of SIM0001 Description Value Voltage sensor input Rated voltage 5 kV 38 kV 1 Continuous voltage with stand 125 V AC 2 Input impedance at 50 60 Hz 1 MΩ 3 Voltage inputs Rated voltage 60 210 V AC Voltage withstand Continuous For 10 s 240 V AC 360 V AC Burden at rated voltage 0 05 VA 1 Ordering option for residual current input 2 Residual current and...

Page 853: ...d 50 V Input impedance at 50 60 Hz 3 MΩ 14 6 Binary inputs Table 756 Binary inputs Description Value Operating range 20 of the rated voltage Rated voltage 24 250 V DC Current drain 1 6 1 9 mA Power consumption 31 0 570 0 mW Threshold voltage 16 176 V DC Reaction time 3 ms 1 Equals the current range of 40 4000 A with a 80 A 3 mV Hz Rogowski 2 Depending on the used nominal current hardware gain 3 Th...

Page 854: ...t load 100 mA at 24 V AC DC 14 8 Signal outputs and IRF output Table 758 Signal outputs and IRF output Description Value 1 Rated voltage 250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 5 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 10 A Make and carry 0 5 s 15 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC 1 A 0 25 A 0 15 A Minimum contact load 10 mA at 5 V AC DC 1 X100 SO1 X110 SO1 SO...

Page 855: ... 24 V AC DC Trip circuit monitoring TCS Control voltage range Current drain through the monitoring cir cuit Minimum voltage over the TCS contact 20 250 V AC DC 1 5 mA 20 V AC DC 15 20 V 14 10 Single pole power output relays X100 PO1 and PO2 Table 760 Single pole power output relays X100 PO1 and PO2 Description Value Rated voltage 250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 8 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 15...

Page 856: ...rt X5 10 pin counter connector Weidmüller BL 3 5 10 180F AU OR BEDR or 9 pin counter connector Weidmüller BL 3 5 9 180F AU OR BEDR 1 Serial port X16 9 pin D sub connector DE 9 Serial port X12 Optical ST connector 14 13 Fibre optic communication link Table 763 Fibre optic communication link Connector Fibre type Wave length Max distance Permitted path attenuation 1 LC MM 62 5 125 or 1300 nm 2 km 8 d...

Page 857: ...Unmodulated Logic level TTL level Current consumption 2 4 mA Power consumption 10 20 mW 14 15 Degree of protection of flush mounted protection relay Table 765 Degree of protection of flush mounted protection relay Description Value Front side IP 543 Rear side connection terminals IP 203 1 Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together 2 According to the 200 04 IRIG standard 3 ...

Page 858: ... 1 2 Relative humidity 93 non condensing Atmospheric pressure 86 106 kPa Altitude Up to 2000 m Transport and storage temperature range 40 85ºC 1 Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance outside the temperature range of 25 55 ºC 2 For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is 70 ºC Technical data 1MRS758755 C 858 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 859: ...t disturbance test IEC 61000 4 18 IEC 60255 26 Common mode 2 5 kV Electrostatic discharge test IEC 61000 4 2 IEC 60255 26 IEEE C37 90 3 2001 Contact discharge 8 kV Air discharge 15 kV Radio frequency interference test 10 V rms IEC 61000 4 6 f 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 60255 26 10 V m rms IEC 61000 4 3 f 80 2700 MHz IEC 60255 26 10 V m ENV 50204 f 900 MHz IEC 60255 26 20 V m rms IEEE C37 90 2 2004 f 80 10...

Page 860: ...etic field immunity test IEC 61000 4 10 2 s 100 A m 1 MHz 400 transients s Voltage dips and short inter ruptions 0 50 ms Criterion A 40 200 ms Criterion C 70 500 ms Criterion C 0 5000 ms Criterion C IEC 61000 4 11 IEC 61000 4 29 IEC 60255 26 Conducted common mode disturbances 15 Hz 150 kHz Test level 3 10 1 10 V rms IEC 61000 4 16 Power frequency immunity test Binary inputs only IEC 61000 4 16 IEC...

Page 861: ...on tests Table 768 Insulation tests Description Type test value Reference Dielectric tests 2 kV 50 Hz 1 min 500 V 50 Hz 1 min communication IEC 60255 27 Impulse voltage test 5 kV 1 2 50 μs 0 5 J 1 kV 1 2 50 μs 0 5 J communication IEC 60255 27 Insulation resistance measurements 100 M Ω 500 V DC IEC 60255 27 Protective bonding resistance 0 1 Ω 4 A 60 s IEC 60255 27 15 3 Mechanical tests Table 769 Me...

Page 862: ...at 40ºC 96 h at 85ºC IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2 Mixed gas corrosion 2 Test parameters according to GR 63 CORE outdoor Temp 30 C 1 RH 70 2 H2S 100 15 ppb Cl2 20 3 ppb NO2 200 30 ppb SO2 200 30 ppb IEC 60068 2 60 test proce dure 2 Salt mist test 2 Severity level 2 IEC 60068 2 52 Test Kb 1 For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is 70 C 2 For relays with optio...

Page 863: ...rence LV directive 2014 35 EU Standard EN 60255 27 EN 60255 1 15 6 EMC compliance Table 772 EMC compliance Description Reference EMC directive 2014 30 EU Standard EN 60255 26 1MRS758755 C Protection relay and functionality tests REC615 RER615 Technical Manual 863 ...

Page 864: ...etic Compatibility Regulations 2016 Electrical Equipment Safety Regulations 2016 The Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electron ic Equipment Regulations 2012 BS EN 60255 1 BS EN 60255 26 BS EN 60255 27 BS EN 61000 6 2 BS EN 61000 6 4 IEC IEC 60255 1 IEC 60255 26 IEC 60255 27 IEC 61000 6 2 IEC 61000 6 4 IEC 61850 Applicable standards and regulations 1MRS758755...

Page 865: ...ystems Defined by the IEEE Standard CPU Central processing unit CT Current transformer CTS Clear to send DAN Doubly attached node DC 1 Direct current 2 Disconnector 3 Double command DCD Data carrier detect DFT Discrete Fourier transform DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by Westronic The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership of the protoc...

Page 866: ...andard series IEC 61850 9 2 A communication protocol based on the IEC 61850 standard series IEC 61850 9 2 LE Lite Edition of IEC 61850 9 2 offering process bus interface IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices IEDs Cyber Se curity Capabilities IP Internet protocol IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255 separated by periods Each server connected to the Internet ...

Page 867: ... peak to peak value is above the set start current or the peak value is above two times the set start value PLC Programmable logic controller PPS Pulse per second PRP Parallel redundancy protocol PTP Precision Time Protocol RAM Random access memory RCA Also known as MTA or base angle Characteristic angle RJ 45 Galvanic connector type RMS Root mean square value RoHS Restriction of hazardous substan...

Page 868: ... cable SW Software TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCS Trip circuit supervision TLV Type length value UL Underwriters Laboratories UTC Coordinated universal time VT Voltage transformer WAN Wide area network WHMI Web human machine interface Glossary 1MRS758755 C 868 REC615 RER615 Technical Manual ...

Page 869: ...voltage www abb com relion www abb com substationautomation ABB Distribution Solutions Digital Substation Products P O Box 699 FI 65101 VAASA Finland Phone 358 10 22 11 1MRS758755 C Copyright 2023 ABB All rights reserved ...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands